Panasonic AJ SPX800E User Manual
Operating Instructions  
Memory Card Camera Recorder  
Model No.  
AJ-  
E
Before operating this product, please read the insructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
Precautions for Use  
„ DO NOT REMOVE PANEL COVER BY  
UNSCREWING.  
WARNING:  
zTO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIP-  
MENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove  
cover. No user serviceable parts inside.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
zTO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY  
FROM ALL LIQUIDS-USE AND STORE ONLY  
IN LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT EXPOSED  
TO THE RISK OF DRIPPING OR SPLASHING  
LIQUIDS, AND DO NOT PLACE ANY LIQUID  
CONTAINERS ON TOP OF THE EQUIPMENT.  
CAUTION:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE,  
USE THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES  
ONLY.  
CAUTION:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK  
HAZARD, REFER MOUNTING OF THE  
OPTIONAL INTERFACE BOARD TO AUTHO-  
RIZED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Lithium Battery  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly  
replaced.  
Warning  
The lithium battery in this equipment must only be  
replaced by qualified personnel. When necessary,  
contact your local Panasonic supplier.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type  
recommended by the equipment manufacturer.  
Discard used batteries according to manufac-  
turer’s instructions.  
“The lithium battery is a critical component (type  
number CR2032 or BR2032 manufactured by  
Panasonic.)  
VARNING  
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd  
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som reko-  
mmenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera  
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.  
It must never be subjected to excessive heat or dis-  
charge. It must therefore only be fitted in equip-  
ment designed specifically for its use.  
Replacement batteries must be of the same type  
and manufacturer. They must be fitted in the same  
manner and location as the original battery, with the  
correct polarity connections observed.  
ADVARSEL!  
Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.  
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fab-  
rikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til  
leverandøren.  
Do not attempt to re-charge the old battery or re-  
use it for any other purpose. It should be disposed  
of in waste products destined for burial rather than  
incineration.”  
VAROITUS  
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asen-  
nettu.  
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosit-  
telemaan tyypiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmista-  
jan ohjeiden mukaisesti.  
indicates safety information.  
3
 
Attention/Attentie  
z Batteries are used for the main power source and memory back-up in the product.  
At the end of their useful life, you should not throw them away.  
Instead, hand them in as small chemical waste.  
z Voor de primaire voeding en het reservegeheugen van het apparaat wordt gebruikgemaakt van  
een batterij.  
Wanneer de batterij is uitgeput, mag u deze niet gewoon weggooien, maar dient u deze als klein  
chemisch afval weg te doen.  
To remove the battery/Verwijderen van de batterij  
Main Power Battery (Ni-Cd Battery)  
Batterij Voor Primaire Voeding (Nikkelcadmiumbatterij)  
Anton/Bauer Battery  
Battery/Batterij BP-90 type  
Anton/Bauer-Batterij  
Battery/Batterij  
BP-90 type  
Unlocking lever  
Ontgrendelingshefboom  
z If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used, check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery.  
z In geval u een batterij van een anden fabrikant zou gebruiken, gelieve dan eerst zorgvuldig de gebruiksaanwijzing van  
deze batterij te lezen.  
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
Batterij Voor Reservegeheugen (Lithiumbatterij)  
z For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end  
of its service life, please consult your dealer.  
z Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van  
de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat bij einde  
levensduur afdankt.  
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)  
Batterij Voor Reservegeheugen (Lithiumbatterij)  
4
Contents  
4-4  
4-4-1  
Selecting Audio Input Signals and  
Precautions for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Adjusting Recording Levels . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Selecting Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Adjusting Recording Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels. . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Setting Time Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Setting the User Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time. . . 38  
Setting the Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Externally Locking the Time Code . . . . . . . . . 39  
Providing an ID to the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Setting UMID Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Mode Check Screen Displays  
1-1  
1-2  
1-3  
Camera Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Recorder/player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
4-4-2  
4-4-3  
4-5  
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions . . 11  
4-5-1  
4-5-2  
4-5-3  
4-5-4  
4-5-5  
4-5-6  
4-5-7  
2-1  
Power Supply and  
Accessory Mounting Section . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Audio (input) Function Section. . . . . . . . . 12  
Audio (output) Function Section . . . . . . . 13  
Shooting and Recording/Playback  
2-2  
2-3  
2-4  
Functions Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Menu Operation Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Time Code Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Warning and Status Display Functions . . 19  
Display Window Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
LCD Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
2-5  
2-6  
2-7  
2-8  
2-9  
2-10  
(MODE CHECK button function). . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Menu Displays in the Viewfinder  
4-6  
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Menu Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Setting Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Selecting Options for USER MENU . . . . . . . . 44  
4-6-1  
4-6-2  
4-6-3  
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback. . . 22  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-9  
P2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Basic Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Normal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
PRE-RECORDING function. . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Loop Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Recording Review Function. . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Normal and Variable Speed Playback. . . 28  
Voice Memo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Shot Mark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
4-7  
Viewfinder Screen Status Displays . . . . .45  
Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout . . . . . . . . 45  
Selecting Viewfinder Display Information . . . . 45  
Display Modes and Setting  
4-7-1  
4-7-2  
4-7-3  
4-7-4  
Changes/adjustment Result Messages. . . . . . 51  
Setting the Marker Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Marker Check Screen Displays  
4-7-5  
4-7-6  
(MARKER SELECT button function). . . . . . . . 52  
Checking Return Video Signal  
4-7-7  
Chapter 4 Adjustments and  
Settings for Recording . . . . 30  
in the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
4-1  
Adjusting the White balance and  
4-8  
4-9  
4-9-1  
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor . .53  
Menu-driven Function Setup . . . . . . . . . .54  
Setting the Switchover of USER SW GAIN. . . 54  
Selecting Video Output Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Selecting Function for  
Black Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Adjusting the White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Adjusting the Black Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
4-1-1  
4-1-2  
4-2  
4-9-2  
4-9-3  
Setting the Electronic Shutter . . . . . . . . . 33  
Shutter Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed. . . . . . . .33  
Placing the Camera-recorder  
4-2-1  
4-2-2  
4-2-3  
the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL Control. . . . . . . . . 54  
Assigning Functions to USER MAIN,  
4-9-4  
4-9-5  
USER1 and USER2 Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Setting Colour Temperature Manually . . . . . . 55  
in SYNCHRO SCAN Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
4-3  
Selecting Recording Signals and  
Recording System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Selecting the Recording Signals.. . . . . . . . . . .34  
Selecting the Recording System . . . . . . . . . . .35  
4-3-1  
4-3-2  
5
4-10  
Handling data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
6-13  
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
4-10-1 Handling SD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
4-10-2 Formatting, Writing and  
6-13-1 Clip Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
6-13-2 P2 Card Status Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Reading an SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
4-10-3 How to Use the User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
4-10-4 How to Use Scene File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
4-10-5 Resetting Menu Option Settings  
Chapter 7 Maintenance and  
Inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
7-1  
Inspections Before Shooting . . . . . . . . . .85  
Preparing for Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Inspecting the Camera Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Inspecting the Memory Recording  
7-1-1  
to Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
4-10-6 Lens File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
7-1-2  
7-1-3  
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Chapter 5 Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
5-1  
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
7-2  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Phenomenon Inherent to CCD Cameras . . . . 87  
Replacing the Backup Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Connector Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
5-1-1  
Mounting the battery and  
7-2-1  
7-2-2  
7-2-3  
7-2-4  
setting the battery type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Using an AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
5-1-2  
5-2  
Mounting the Viewfinder and  
Adjusting its Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Mounting the lens and Performing  
7-3  
Warning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Warning Description Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
7-3-1  
7-3-2  
5-3  
the Flange Back and  
White Shading Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Preparing for Audio Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
When Using the Front Microphone . . . . . . . . .72  
When Using a Wireless Receiver . . . . . . . . . .72  
When Using Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables . . 91  
5-4  
8-1  
Menu Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
SYSTEM SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
SYSTEM MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
OPTION MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
REC FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
OUTPUT SEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
LCD MONITOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
GENLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
5-4-1  
8-2  
5-4-2  
5-4-3  
8-2-1  
8-2-2  
8-2-3  
8-2-4  
8-2-5  
8-2-6  
5-5  
Mounting the Camera on a Tripod. . . . . . 73  
Attaching the Shoulder Strap. . . . . . . . . . 74  
Attaching the Rain Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Connecting the AJ-EC3E  
5-6  
5-7  
5-8  
Extension Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Attaching the Front Audio Level  
8-3  
PAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
ROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
MATRIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
COLOR CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
LOW SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
MID SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
HIGH SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
ADDITIONAL DTL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
SKIN TONE DTL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
KNEE/LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
8-3-1  
8-3-2  
8-3-3  
8-3-4  
8-3-5  
8-3-6  
8-3-7  
8-3-8  
8-3-9  
5-9  
Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips  
with Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . 76  
6-1  
6-2  
6-3  
6-4  
6-5  
6-6  
6-7  
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview. . . . . 76  
Thumbnail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Selecting Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Playing Back Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Switching the Thumbnail Display. . . . . . . 79  
Shot Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Playing Back Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Recording a Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Deleting Voice Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
8-3-10 GAMMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
8-3-11 FLARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
8-3-12 CAMERA SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
6-7-1  
6-7-2  
6-7-3  
8-4  
VF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
VF DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
VF MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
USER BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
VF INDICATOR1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
VF INDICATOR2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
MODE CHECK IND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
!LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
8-4-1  
8-4-2  
8-4-3  
8-4-4  
8-4-5  
8-4-6  
8-4-7  
6-8  
Deleting Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Restoring Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Formatting a P2 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Formatting SD Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode. . . . 83  
6-9  
6-10  
6-11  
6-12  
6
8-5  
8-5-1  
CAM OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
CAMERA ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
SHUTTER SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
SHUTTER SELECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
USER SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
SW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
WHITE BALANCE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
USER SW GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
IRIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
8-5-2  
8-5-3  
8-5-4  
8-5-5  
8-5-6  
8-5-7  
8-5-8  
8-6  
MAIN OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
BATTERY/P2CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
BATTERY SETTING1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
BATTERY SETTING2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
MIC/AUDIO1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
MIC/AUDIO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
TC/UB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
UMID SET/INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
8-6-1  
8-6-2  
8-6-3  
8-6-4  
8-6-5  
8-6-6  
8-6-7  
8-7  
FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
SD CARD READ/WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
SD CARD R/W SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
LENS FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
SCENE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
INITIALIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
8-7-1  
8-7-2  
8-7-3  
8-7-4  
8-7-5  
8-8  
MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
SYSTEM CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
LENS ADJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
BLACK SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
WHITE SHADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
DIAGNOSTIC1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
DIAGNOSTIC2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
HOURS METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
8-8-1  
8-8-2  
8-8-3  
8-8-4  
8-8-5  
8-8-6  
8-8-7  
8-9  
8-9-1  
OPTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Chapter 9 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 115  
7
Chapter 1 Introduction  
The AJ-SPX800E video camera-recorder integrates a camera unit equipped with three CCDs, incorporating a 2/3-inch on-chip lens  
featuring progressive drive technology, and a video recorder/player (VTR) that supports DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV formats.  
The camera offers a choice of interlaced scanning and progressive scanning modes. The AJ-SPX800E provides for a wide range of  
uses, with such features as film-like gamma correction capability for authoring, and storage-type gain-up capability for news picture  
shooting.  
Utilising P2 cards, which require no mechanism, as media, your AJ-SPX800E offers greater responsibility, operability, and portability.  
It is highly resistant to shock and vibration during recording, and therefore ensures stable operation for capturing quality video images  
under the most adverse conditions.  
1-1  
Camera Unit Features  
/Three CCDs with a 2/3-inch on-chip lens that  
/Auto White Balance with Automatic Tracking  
supports progressive scanning  
capability  
The camera supports aspect ratios of 16:9 and 4:3.  
Operators can choose between interlaced scanning and  
progressive scanning modes, to handle a wide range of  
applications.  
The white balance is automatically adjusted in real time,  
according to the subject. This is effective for urgent  
recording, where you can’t spare the time to make an  
adjustment through the auto white balance feature.  
In progressive scan mode, signals from and to the recorder/  
player are converted to interlaced signals.  
/Data Management Capability  
Your AJ-SPX800E has inbuilt data storage capacity for one  
user and four scene files. In addition, an SD card can be  
used as a setup card to store data for up to eight setups.  
/Innovative 14-bit A/D Converted Digital Signal  
Processing Circuit  
This model utilises new 14-bit linear A/D conversion  
technology to digitise video. The signal processor, operating  
at 36 MHz, provides finer reproduction of video, together  
with enhanced stability and reliability.  
<Note>  
The SD cards used on your video camera-recorder must  
conform to SD standards. The cards must be formatted  
using the AJ-SPX800E. However, SD cards formatted,  
according to SD standards with other devices, including  
PCs, are also recognised by the AJ-SPX800E.  
/Storage-type Sensitivity Enhancement  
The camera unit is equipped with a storage-type gain-up  
capability featuring progressive drive technology. This  
capability adds up to 20 dB to the standard gain increase.  
SD cards with capacities of  
recommended.  
8
MB or more are  
/Customisable USER Buttons and USER MENU  
/Digital Zoom  
The camera unit has three USER buttons, operable by a  
single press, to which frequently used function may be  
assigned. The on-screen menu is also customisable. You  
can create an original user menu screen by selecting  
frequently used menu items. The menu thus created can be  
displayed with a single touch of the MENU button.  
The camera unit features progressive digital zoom. This is  
particularly effective when you want to zoom-in closer on the  
subject.  
/12-axis Independent Colour Correction  
Operating as a paint function, this capability independently  
corrects colours for each of the 12 axes. This feature helps  
to produce fine images.  
/MARKER SELECT Button  
Your video camera-recorder has a button on the front that  
allows you to view marker information on the viewfinder  
screen. This is useful for checking the view angle during  
shooting.  
/Film-like Gamma Correction  
This capability provides a choice of four gamma types. In  
addition to the standard mode, two types of film-like  
gammas are available to help enhance video expression in  
productions. The newly developed News Gamma accurately  
records changes in shadow areas and reduces whiteout in  
highlighted areas. This is particularly useful for on-site news  
shooting.  
/Support for ECU  
Your video camera-recorder supports the extension control  
unit AJ-EC3E.  
<Note>  
While your AJ-SPX800E supports progressive scanning,  
constantly increasing the storage-type gain causes a slight  
degree of brightening at the upper left corner of the screen  
due to CCD characteristics. Note also that the dynamic  
range of video signals in progressive scanning mode is  
about half that in interlaced driving mode.  
8
   
1-2  
Recorder/player Features  
/Multiple Slots  
/Voice Memos & Shot Marks  
The AJ-SPX800E is equipped with five slots for P2 cards.  
Up to five cards may be inserted in these slots for  
continuous recording. They also provide new recording  
capabilities specific to memory cards.  
Each clip can incorporate comments, in the form of voice  
memos, associated with the time code, together with shot  
marks which, for example, can help you distinguish OK cuts  
from reject cuts.  
1
Both voice memos and shot marks can be added to  
selected clips during and after a recording. This is helpful for  
editing recorded video.  
z Hot-Swap recording  
The Hot-Swap capability allows cards not in use to be  
replaced without interrupting recording. This facilitates  
continuous recording.  
/Support for SDI Output (when AJ-YA902AG  
z Loop recording  
installed)  
The AJ-SPX800E can retain a certain amount of  
previously recorded material by continuously loop-  
recording data into a specified recording area.  
z PRE-RECORDING function  
The AJ-SPX800E, when equipped with the extension board  
AJ-YA902AG, can output SDI signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
In standby status, the AJ-SPX800E always stores video  
and sound input to the camera for up to 15 seconds (for  
the DVCPRO format). This means that the PRE-  
RECORDING function, when turned on, records the video  
and sound for a preceding duration preset by the user.  
This feature recovers critical moments that you might  
have missed.  
/Front-mounted Sound Level Control Mechanism  
The AJ-SPX800E features a front-mounted control for fine  
adjustment of the sound recording level. This control is  
particularly effective for adjusting the sound level when you  
are shooting without a sound recordist. The control can be  
disabled.  
z Data protection  
/Support for Built-in Unislot® Wireless Receive  
The AJ-SPX800E is designed to support an optional slot-in  
wireless receiver.  
Data on P2 cards will not be lost due to overwriting unless  
the files are deleted or the cards are initialised.  
Recordings are written only to free space.  
/Format User-switchable Between DVCPRO50,  
/Recording Review Capability  
DVCPRO and DV  
This capability automatically plays back the last 2 to 10  
seconds of recorded video, allowing you to quickly check the  
recorded contents.  
Recorded video is compressed through a component digital  
recording method that uses a state-of-the-art compression  
technology, and sound is recorded using the non-  
compression PCM recording method, which excels in such  
areas as S/N ratio, frequency bands, waveform properties  
and reproducibility of fine areas. These methods further  
enhance the quality of images and sound.  
/Built-in Time Code Generator/reader  
A special-purpose secondary code track can be used to  
record and reproduce time code information.  
The format is user-selectable, according to your purpose:  
e.g., DVCPRO50 for higher image quality, or DVCPRO for  
cost efficiency. DV format is also supported.  
/Support for Metadata  
The AJ-SPX800E is capable of recording positional  
information (latitudes, longitudes and altitudes), as UMID  
information (metadata), from the GPS unit AJ-GPS900G  
(optional accessory).  
This information is also useful in managing information on  
P2 cards.  
<Note>  
When the clip is played back in the format not selected on  
the menu, the picture may be disturbed until the format is  
detected.  
/Recording Time  
/4-channel Digital Audio Recording (all formats)  
All formats - DVCPRO, DV and DVCPRO50 - support 4-  
channel digital audio recording with high-quality sound (48  
kHz/16 bits).  
(Number of cards used: 1)  
Recording Format  
Card #  
DVCPRO  
(Audio 2ch)  
DVCPRO50  
(Audio 4ch)  
/Clip Thumbnailing  
z Automatic generation of thumbnails  
Approx.  
8 minutes  
Approx.  
4 minutes  
AJ-P2COO2SG  
The AJ-SPX800E automatically generates a thumbnail for  
each recording cut (clip). It is possible to make use of this  
on the camera-recorder as well as for non-linear editing  
purposes, and after uploading to a server.  
(For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
appropriate memory card.)  
z Thumbnail display on the LCD monitor  
The 3.5-inch colour LCD side of the your video camera-  
recorder can provide a multi-screen view of 12 clip  
thumbnails. You can choose a desired clip to playback  
instantly.  
z Seamless playback of selected clips  
You can select more than one clip from the thumbnail view  
for continuous playback and output of seamless video.  
9
 
1-3  
System Configuration  
®
Microphone kit:  
AJ-MC700P  
Extension control unit:  
AJ-EC3E  
Unislot wireless  
microphone receiver:  
Sennheiser EK3041  
Stereo microphone:*  
AJ-MC900G  
DIONIC90/160  
HYTRON50/100/120  
PRO14, TRIM14  
Viewfinder:  
AJ-VF15B  
AJ-VF20WB  
V mount type  
Battery plate  
ENDURA50/80  
BP-L60/90  
Lens:  
(Bayonet type)  
Fujinon, Canon  
NP-1 type  
Battery mount  
NP-L50  
BP-90 type  
Battery mount  
BP-H120  
HP-90L  
Video camera-recorder  
AJ-SPX800E  
GPS unit:  
AJ-GPS900G  
AC adaptor:  
AJ-B75  
SDI output board:  
AJ-YA902AG  
Rain cover:  
SHAN-RC700  
P2 Cards:  
AJ-P2C002SG  
Soft carry-case:  
AJ-SC900  
Hard carry-case:  
AJ-HT901  
SD Memory cards  
* To install a stereo microphone, an extra modification is required. For more information, contact your distributor or designated service  
provider.  
10  
 
Chapter 2 Parts and their Functions  
2-1  
Power Supply and Accessory Mounting Section  
2
POWER switch  
Used to turn on/off the power.  
Lens mount cap  
To remove the cap, raise the  
lens lever.  
When the lens is not mounted, replace the cap.  
Battery mount  
A battery pack from Anton/Bauer is mounted here.  
Lens cable/microphone cable clamp  
This clamp secures the lens and microphone cables.  
DC IN (external power input) socket (XLR, 4P)  
Tripod mount  
When you want to mount the AJ-SPX800E on a tripod, the  
optional tripod attachment (SHAN-TM700) is attached here.  
To operate your AJ-SPX800E on AC power, the AC adaptor  
AJ-B75 (optional accessory) must be connected to this  
socket.  
BREAKER switch  
LENS jack (12-pin)  
When an excessive amount of current is fed through the  
video camera-recorder, due to any abnormal event, the  
breaker automatically turns off the power in order to protect  
the device.  
The lens connection cord is connected here. For a detailed  
description of your lens, see the relevant manufacturer’s  
instruction manual.  
After the interior of the video camera-recorder has been  
checked and/or repaired, this button must be depressed. If  
there is no unusual reaction, the unit can be powered-up.  
GPS connector  
This connects the optional GPS unit AJ-GPS900G.  
Shoulder strap fittings  
The shoulder strap is attached here.  
Light shoe  
A video light or similar accessory can be attached here.  
Lens mount (bayonet type)  
The lens is attached here.  
Lens lever  
Lower this lever to lock the lens to the lens mount.  
11  
   
2-2  
Audio (input) Function Section  
MIC IN (microphone input) jack (XLR, 3-pin)  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio input channel 1 & 2)  
connectors (XLR, 3-pin)  
Audio devices or a microphone may be connected here.  
A microphone (optional accessory) is connected here.  
Power for the microphone comes from this jack.  
A remote microphone may be connected. In this case, the  
power supply to the appropriate connector must be enabled  
through menu option FRONT MIC POWER or REAR MIC  
POWER.  
LINE/MIC/+48V (line input/mic input/mic input +  
48V) selector switch  
Used to select the audio signal input from the  
CH1/CH2 connectors.  
AUDIO IN  
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen on  
the MAIN OPERATION page.  
A stereo microphone may be connected, but you will need to  
replace the connector. For more information, contact your  
distributor or designated service provider.  
LINE:  
MIC:  
Audio signal line-input from the audio device is  
input.  
Audio signal from  
a
self-powered (active)  
microphone is input. (The main unit does not  
supply power to the remote microphone).  
+ 48V: Audio signal from a passive microphone is input.  
(The unit supplies power to the remote  
microphone).  
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2  
recording level adjustment) controls  
With the  
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch positioned to  
[MAN], these controls can be used to adjust the recording  
levels for Audio Channels 1/2.  
Note that the controls are designed to be locked. For  
adjustment, each control must be depressed while turning.  
Wireless slot  
®
A Unislot wireless receiver (optional accessory) may be  
attached here.  
AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1 & 2 automatic/  
FRONT AUDIO LEVEL (audio recording level  
adjustment) control  
This control adjusts the recording levels for Audio Channels  
1 and 2. Level adjustment does not depend on the position  
of the AUDIO SELECT switch.  
The control can be enabled or disabled through the menu  
options FRONT VR CH1 or FRONT VR CH2. These options  
can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen on the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
manual level adjustment selector) switch  
Use this switch to select recording level control mode for  
Audio Channels 1 and 2.  
AUTO:  
MAN:  
Recording level automatically controlled.  
Recording level manually controlled.  
AUDIO IN (audio input selector) switch  
Use this switch to select the signals recorded through Audio  
Channels 1 - 4.  
FRONT: Signal from the microphone connected to the  
MIC IN jack is recorded.  
W.L. (WIRELESS)  
Signal from the slot-in wireless receiver is  
recorded.  
REAR: Signal from the audio device connected to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connector is recorded.  
12  
   
2-3  
Audio (output) Function Section  
AUDIO OUT connector (XLR, 5-pin)  
Speakers  
This connector outputs audio signals recorded on Channels  
1/2 or 3/4.  
The speakers output EE sound during recording, and  
reproduced sound during playback.  
Output signals are selected with the MONITOR SELECT  
CH1/2 / CH3/4 selector switch.  
The speakers emit an alarm sound when the warning lamp  
blinks and/or the indicator activates.  
2
When the  
PHONES jack is connected with earphones,  
sound from the speaker is automatically muted.  
MONITOR SELECT (audio channel) CH1/2 / CH3/4  
selector switch  
PHONES (earphones) jack (mini jack)  
Use this switch to select the audio channel whose signals  
are output to the speakers, earphones or AUDIO OUT  
connector.  
This connector is designed for audio monitoring (stereo)  
earphones. When earphones are connected, sound from  
the speakers is automatically muted.  
CH1/2:  
CH3/4:  
Signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2 are output.  
Signals on Audio Channels 3 and 4 are output.  
Both the front and rear connectors output the same sound.  
DC OUT (DC power supply) output socket  
This output socket is designed for 12-VDC. It provides a  
maximum current of 1 A.  
The channel indications on the display window and on the  
audio level meter in the viewfinder are synchronised with  
this selector switch.  
When a voice memo is being played back, the recorded  
voice is output to the speakers and earphones, regardless  
of the switch position.  
Voice memo microphone  
Used to record a voice memo.  
For more information on voice memos, see [3-8 Voice Memo  
Function].  
<Note>  
Whenever two-channel recording is performed in the  
DVCPRO25 or DV format, the signals on Audio Channels 1  
and 2 are output and indicated.  
VOICE MEMO button  
Used to record a voice memo during recording or playback,  
or recording or playback is paused. Another press of the  
button stops voice memo recording.  
MONITOR SELECT (audio selection) CH1/3 / ST /  
CH2/4 selector switch  
The MONITOR SELECT switch is synchronised with the  
audio signal output to the speakers and earphones, and  
from the AUDIO OUT connector.  
CH1/3: Signal on Audio Channel 1 or 3 is output.  
ST:  
Stereo audio signals on Audio Channels 1 and 2  
or Audio Channels 3 or 4 are output. The stereo  
signals can be changed to mixed signals using a  
menu option.  
CH2/4: Signal on Audio Channel 2 or 4 is output.  
MONITOR SELECT switch  
Monitor  
switch  
CH1/2  
CH3/4  
CH1/3  
ST  
Audio Channel 1  
Stereo signals from  
Audio Channel 3  
Stereo signals from  
Audio Channels 1 and 2* Audio Channels 3 and 4*  
CH2/4  
Audio Channel 2 Audio Channel 4  
* You can select between stereo and mixed signal types using the  
menu option MONITOR SELECT. This menu option can be found  
in the <MIC/AUDIO2> screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
MONITOR (volume) control  
Used to control the volume of sound output from the monitor  
speakers and earphones.  
ALARM (warning alarm volume adjustment)  
Used to control the volume of the warning sound emitted  
from  
speakers or earphones connected to the  
PHONES jack.  
If the control is minimised, no alarm is audible.  
13  
 
2-4  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section  
/Shooting and Recording (camera unit)  
CC/ND FILTER (filter selector) control  
AUTO W/B (white/black) BAL switch  
Used to select a filter appropriate for illumination and colour  
temperature of the subject.  
When the menu option DISP MODE is set to “3”, switching  
this control displays the selected filter number in the  
viewfinder.  
AWB:  
White balance is automatically adjusted.  
When the WHITE BAL switch on the side is  
positioned at [A] or [B], the adjusted value is  
stored in the memory.  
However, if “VAR” is selected for the menu options  
AWB A and AWB B, the value set through the  
menu options is used, and this function does not  
work. Menu options can be found in the <WHITE  
BALANCE MODE> screen on the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
Note also that when the switch is positioned at  
PRST this function does not work.  
Back balance is automatically adjusted.  
To automatically correct black shading, the AUTO  
W/B BAL switch must be pressed toward [ABB] for  
longer than five seconds.  
Examples of filter selection according to shooting conditions  
Setting of the  
CC/ND FILTER Description of filter Shooting conditions  
control  
Sunrise, sunset  
Studio  
1
2
3
3200K  
ABB:  
Clear outdoor  
environments  
5600K + 1/8  
5600K  
Cloudy/rainy outdoor  
environments  
<Note>  
To stop automatic adjustment of the white or black balance  
in progress, set the switch to either ([AWB] or [ABB]).  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
Clear, bright scenes  
such as snowscape,  
high mountains,  
beaches, etc.  
4
5600K + 1/64  
Gain selector switch  
USER MAIN, USER 1 and USER 2 buttons  
Use this switch to select video amplifier gain, according to  
lighting conditions under which you are shooting.  
The values for L, M, and H can be preset using menu  
options.  
These are factory-set to 0 dB for L, 9 dB for M, and 18 dB for  
H.  
These buttons can be assigned user-selected functions,  
using a menu option. Each button, when pressed, performs  
the assigned function.  
For more information, see [4-9-4 Assigning Functions to  
USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 Buttons.  
SHUTTER switch  
Used to enable or disable the electronic shutter.  
OFF:  
ON:  
SEL:  
Electronic shutter disabled.  
Electronic shutter enabled.  
Used to change the speed of the electronic  
shutter.  
This dial switch returns to its original position. Each turn of  
the switch alters the shutter speed.  
For more information, see [4-2 Setting the Electronic  
Shutter].  
14  
   
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch  
MARKER SELECT button  
Used to select the video signals sent from the camera unit to  
the memory, viewfinder and video monitor.  
This button selects the marker information indicated on the  
viewfinder screen. It switches between two marker  
information indications, which can be selected using a menu  
option. Pressing this button once switches the indicated  
marker information from A (Marker A) to B (Marker B), and  
pressing again switches B to OFF (no marker). When the  
power is turned on, the last selected indication before  
power-down appears.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE ON:  
Video being recorded through the camera is sent with the  
auto knee circuit activated.  
CAM. AUTO KNEE OFF:  
Video being recorded through the camera is sent in  
manual knee mode.  
BARS:  
2
For more information, see [4-7-6 Marker Check Screen  
Displays (MARKER SELECT button function)].  
Colour bar signal is output. The auto knee circuit does not  
work.  
You can select between four types of colour bar signal. For  
more information, see [8-5-5 SW MODE].  
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons  
These buttons are enabled when the  
shutter switch is  
positioned at [ON] and synchro scan is selected.  
They are used to adjust the speed of the synchro scan.  
The –
ޓ
button decreases shutter speed; the + button  
increases shutter speed.  
If you shoot a PC monitor, for example, you should adjust  
shutter speed so that the horizontal bars in the viewfinder  
will produce less noise.  
Auto Knee function  
Usually, when you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery against a  
strongly lit background, the background will be totally whited-out, with  
buildings and other objects blurred. In this case, the auto knee function  
reproduces the background clearly. This function is effective when:  
• The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear sky.  
• The subject is a person inside a car or building, and you also want to  
capture the background visible through a window.  
/Shooting  
and  
Recording/Playback  
Function  
• The subject is a high-contrast scene.  
Section (recording)  
REC START/STOP button  
Pressing this button starts recording, pressing again stops  
recording.  
This button has the same function as the  
the handle and the VTR button at the lens.  
WHITE BAL (white balance memory selector)  
switch  
Used to select the white balance adjustment method.  
REC button on  
PRST: Use this when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance.  
The value for the white balance is factory-set to  
3200 K.  
It can be changed to any colour temperature using  
a menu option. For more information, see [4-9-5  
Setting Colour Temperature Manually].  
SHOT MARK button  
Pressing this button while recording adds a shot mark to the  
thumbnail of that clip. This button also adds a shot mark to  
any thumbnail selected on the LCD monitor.  
For more information on shot marks, see [3-9 Shot Mark  
Function].  
A or B: Pressing the  
AUTO W/B BAL Switch toward  
[AWB] automatically adjusts the white balance,  
saving the adjusted value in Memory A or B. For  
more information, see [4-1-1 Adjusting the White  
Balance].  
SAVE ON/OFF switch  
Used to select the power supply method for each output  
section.  
Your video camera-recorder is factory-set to save the  
adjusted value. Through a menu option, the auto-tracking  
white balance (ATW) can be assigned to B, or desired colour  
temperatures can be assigned to A and B.  
For more information, see [4-1-1 Adjusting the White  
Balance].  
ON:  
The output selected through the menu option  
SAVE SW is power-saved. This option can be  
found on the OPTION MODE screen on the  
SYSTEM SETTINGS page.  
OFF:  
Power saving is canceled.  
<Note>  
MODE CHECK button  
During recording, this switch produces no effect. The power  
supply method is switched after recording is finished.  
Each press of this button changes the screen type in the  
viewfinder in the following order: STATUS, !LED,  
FUNCTION, AUDIO.  
VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
This switch controls the superimposition of characters onto  
the video output from the VIDEO OUT connector.  
This does not affect the signal output from the camera.  
ON:  
Characters are superimposed.  
OFF:  
Characters are not superimposed.  
For types of characters, see [4-9-2 Selecting Video Output  
Signals].  
15  
OUTPUT SEL (output signal selection) switch  
Used to switch the signals output from the VIDEO OUT and  
MON OUT connectors.  
USB 2.0 connector  
A USB 2.0 cable is connected here. (To be supported in the  
near future.)  
MEM:  
In EE (recording) mode, video from the camera is  
output. In VV (playback) mode, playback signal  
from a P2 card is output.  
Video from the camera is output constantly.  
Video is not output, and the video camera-  
recorder operates in power-saving mode.  
GENLOCK IN connector  
This connector is used to input a reference signal when the  
camera unit is gen-locked, or when the time code is  
externally locked. If VIDEO is selected for the menu option  
REC SIGNAL, the connector can be used to record actual  
signals. The menu option REC SIGNAL is found on the  
SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM SETTINGS page.  
CAM:  
OFF:  
Note that the audio output is synchronised with the video.  
For types of video outputs, see [4-9-2 Selecting Video  
Output Signals].  
<Notes>  
z The reference input signal must be a standard VBS  
(Video Burst Sync).  
REW (rewind) button and lamp  
During pause, this button performs a fast-reverse playback  
with the lamp blinking.  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4C fast-  
reverse playback with the PLAY and REW lamps blinking.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the start  
of the clip being played back is located in pause mode.  
z If you need to synchronise the input signal with the AJ-  
SPX800E when “VIDEO” is selected for the REC SIGNAL,  
set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”. The option  
GENLOCK is found on the GENLOCK screen, which is  
accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
MON OUT (monitor output) connector  
This connector outputs the video signal to the monitor. The  
video signals linked to the setting of the OUTPUT SEL  
switch are output from here. Through an internal menu  
option, the characters can be superimposed independently  
of the VIDEO OUT connector. For more information, see [4-  
9-2 Selecting Video Output Signals].  
FF (fast forward) button and lamp  
During pause, this button is used to perform fast playback  
with the lamp blinking.  
During playback, it performs an approximately 4C fast  
playback with the PLAY and FF lamps blinking.  
If this button is pressed when playback is paused, the start  
of the next clip is located in pause mode.  
Connector cover  
This cover must be removed in order to attach the optional  
connector 1394. For directions on attaching the connector,  
see the instruction manual for the optional connector 1394.  
(To be supported in the near future.)  
STOP button  
This button stops playback.  
PLAY/PAUSE button  
This button is used to view playback using the viewfinder  
screen or a colour video monitor. The lamp comes on when  
playback starts.  
In playback mode, this button pauses (PLAY PAUSE)  
playback with the lamp blinking.  
ECU REMOTE (remote control) connector  
The extension control unit AJ-EC3E (optional accessory) is  
connected here.  
VIDEO OUT (video signal output) connector  
This connector outputs video signals. The video signals  
linked to the setting of the OUTPUT SEL switch are output  
from here.  
REC button  
Pressing this button starts recording, and pressing again  
stops recording.  
This button has the same function as the  
STOP button and the VTR button at the lens.  
REC START/  
It may be disabled with the  
recording protection button.  
REC protection button  
This button disables the  
REC button on the handle.  
ON:  
OFF:  
The REC button is enabled.  
The REC button is disabled.  
P2 CARD STATUS LED  
This LED indicates the recording and playback status of  
each card.  
Slide lock button  
Used to open the slide-out door for inserting P2 cards. While  
depressing this button, slide the door to the left.  
16  
2-5  
Menu Operation Section  
2
MENU button  
Used to turn on/off the menu.  
JOG dial button  
With the menu open, this button is used to navigate through  
menu pages, select options and specify values.  
For directions on manipulating the menu, see [4-6 Menu  
Displays in the Viewfinder Screen].  
SD card insertion slot  
An SD card (optional accessory) is inserted here.  
BUSY (operation mode display) lamp  
This lamp indicates the active status of the SD card.  
It stays illuminated when the card is active.  
<Note>  
While the lamp is on, do not insert or remove the card.  
17  
 
2-6  
Time Code Section  
GENLOCK IN connector (BNC)  
TCG (time code selector) switch  
This switch is used to specify the stepping mode for the  
built-in time code generator.  
This connector is used to input a reference signal before the  
camera unit is gen-locked, or before the time code is  
externally locked.  
F-RUN: Select this position to continuously advance the  
time code independently of the P2 card recording  
status.  
TC IN connector (BNC)  
This connector is used to input a reference time code when  
you externally lock the time code.  
Use this mode to synchronise the time code with  
the time of day, or to externally lock the time code.  
SET:  
Select this position to set the time code and/or  
user bits.  
TC OUT connector (BNC)  
R-RUN: Select this position to advance the time code only  
during recording.  
When you inter-lock the time code of the AJ-SPX800E with  
that of an external device this must be connected with the  
time code input (TC IN) connector of the external device.  
For spliced scenes recorded on P2 cards, the  
sequence of time codes is unbroken.  
HOLD button  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
Pressing this button freezes the time data indication on the  
counter. Note that time code generation continues. Pressing  
the button again reactivates the counter.  
This function is used to ascertain the time code of a  
particular recorded scene.  
Use these buttons to set the time code and user bits.  
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons, and  
the centre rectangular one is the SET button.  
For guidance in setting the time code and user’s bit, see [4-5  
Setting Time Data].  
RESET button  
This button resets the time data on the counter to  
“00:00:00:00”.  
If this button is pressed when with the  
TCG switch  
positioned at [SET], CTL* data, time code data, user bit  
data, and real-time data are reset to 0. Real-time data is  
also reset to the defaults.  
DISPLAY (counter display selector) switch  
Indications of the time code, CTL* and user bits on the  
counter of the display window depend on the positions of  
this switch and the  
TCG switch.  
Pressing the  
Zone.  
HOLD button also displays Date/Time/Time  
UB:  
TC:  
CTL*:  
User bits indicated.  
Time code indicated.  
CTL indicated.  
* CTL will be supported in the near future.  
18  
 
2-7  
Warning and Status Display 2-8  
Display Window Functions  
Functions  
P2 card/battery-remaining level indications  
Media-remaining space indication bar  
The bar indicates the remaining free space on each P2 card, using a  
seven-segment display.  
2
Each segment can represent either three or five minutes of remaining  
free space, depending on the value set through the menu option  
CARD REMAIN/„. According to the set value, the segments  
disappear one-by-one. The menu option CARD REMAIN /„ can be  
found in the <BATTERY/P2CARD> screen on the MAIN OPERATION  
page.  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD W DV GPS  
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
Battery-remaining level indication bar  
Back tally lamp  
When the BACK TALLY switch is set to [ON], the lamp  
behaves in the same way as the front tally lamp at the  
viewfinder.  
For a battery with a digital indicator (percentage indication), if  
the remaining level of the battery is higher than 70%, all seven  
segments up to the “F” position are lit.  
When the remaining level falls below 70%, the segments go out  
one-by-one for each drop of 10%. All seven segments can be set  
to light up when the battery-remaining balance is 100%. To do  
so select “100%” for the menu option BATT REMAIN FULL in the  
P2CARD> screen of the MAIN OPERATION page.  
BACK TALLY switch  
This switch controls the action of the  
tally lamps.  
back and  
rear  
Audio channel level meter  
ON:  
OFF:  
Back and rear tally lamps enabled.  
Back and rear tally lamps disabled.  
When the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4 switch is set to  
[CH1/2], the meter indicates 1 and 2 as the audio channel  
numbers, together with their audio levels. When the switch is set  
to [CH3/4], the meter indicates 3 and 4 as the audio channel  
numbers, together with their audio levels.  
WARNING lamp  
This lamp starts blinking or lights up if something unusual  
occurs in the memory.  
Memory action status indication  
Error Code Indication (for more information, see [7-3  
Warning System])  
LIGHT button  
Use this button to control illumination of the display window.  
Alternately pressing this button toggles illumination of the  
display window on or off.  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD W DV GPS  
0
Display window  
This window displays warnings, battery-remaining level,  
sound volume, time data, and other information.  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
Rear tally lamp  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
When the  
BACK TALLY switch is set on [ON], the rear  
tally lamp behaves in the same way as the back tally lamp.  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
Information indication  
LOOP:  
Stays illuminated in LOOP REC mode. For information  
about the LOOP REC mode, see [4-5 Setting Time Data].  
DRIVE: Stays illuminated when the menu option USB is set to  
“ON”.The menu option USB can be found in the  
<SYSTEM MODE> screen on the SYSTEM SETTING  
page. (To be supported in the near future.)  
OP-SLOT:Stays illuminated when the optional slot is available. (To  
be supported in the near future.)  
19  
   
2-9  
LCD Monitor  
Mode indication  
W:  
DV:  
Stays illuminated in 16:9 mode.  
Stays illuminated when the recording/playback format is  
DV.  
GPS:  
GPS  
Stays illuminated when radio waves are not received  
during GPS operation.  
Stays illuminated when radio waves are received during  
GPS operation.  
:
P-REC: Stays illuminated when PRE RECORDING is not set to 0  
seconds, and blinks when recording is continued after the  
recording tally lamp has gone out.  
OVER  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD W DV GPS  
0
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
13  
24  
LCD monitor  
The LCD monitor displays the video in the viewfinder.  
Alternatively, it can show clips on the P2 card in a thumbnail  
format.  
Time code indication  
SLAVE: Stays illuminated when the time code is externally locked.  
HOLD:  
CTL*:  
TCG:  
TC:  
Stays illuminated when the time code generator/reader  
value is frozen.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [CTL] to display the CTL count.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) generator value.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [TC] (or [UB]) to display the TC (or UB) reader value.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the VIUB generator value.  
In thumbnail display mode, clips can be edited or deleted, or  
P2 cards can be formatted using the  
and CURSOR and SET buttons.  
MENU BAR button  
OPEN button  
Used to open the LCD monitor.  
VTCG:  
VTC:  
THUMBNAIL button  
This button switches the content on the  
LCD monitor  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the VIUB reader value.  
from the video in the viewfinder to clip thumbnails. Another  
press switches them back to the video from the viewfinder.  
Note that this switchover is not performed during a recording  
or playback.  
TIME:  
DATE:  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the real-time hour, minute and second.  
Stays illuminated when the DISPLAY switch is positioned  
at [UB] to display the real-time date.  
No Indication:  
MENU BAR button  
In thumbnail display mode, this button allows you to  
manipulate the menu bar (e.g., to delete clips).  
The CTL, VTGC, TIME, and DATE stay off when the  
DISPLAY switch is positioned at [UB] to display real time,  
time zone, hour and minute.  
Time count indication:  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
The time code, CTL*, user bits and real time are shown.  
The four triangular buttons are the CURSOR buttons, and  
the centre rectangular one is the SET button.  
They are used to select a thumbnail and manipulate the  
* CTL will be supported in the near future.  
<Note>  
When the DISPLAY switch is positioned at UB, each press of the  
HOLD button changes the indication through VTCG (VTC) ꢀ DATE  
ꢀ TIME ꢀ No Indication (Time Zone) ꢀ TCG (TC), in that order.  
menu bar. For more information, see [Chapter  
Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails].  
6
20  
 
2-10 Viewfinder  
Back tally lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated during shooting. It also blinks in  
synchronisation with the REC lamp in the viewfinder, and  
provides alerts.  
When the lever is positioned at [OFF], the back tally lamp is  
hidden.  
2
Eyepiece  
Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this to make adjustments in line with your diopter, in  
order to obtain optimum clarity in the viewfinder image.  
Connecting plug  
Locking ring  
Viewfinder (optional accessory)  
During recording or playback, the viewfinder displays the  
video image in monochrome. It also displays warnings,  
messages, zebra patterns, markers (safety zone and centre  
markers), etc.  
Microphone holder  
ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch  
This switch is used to display the zebra pattern in the  
viewfinder.  
Viewfinder stopper  
Used to attach or remove the viewfinder.  
ON:  
Zebra pattern displayed.  
OFF:  
No zebra pattern displayed.  
TALLY switch  
Used to control the  
front tally lamp.  
HIGH:  
OFF:  
Front tally lamp brightly illuminated.  
Front tally lamp stays off.  
LOW:  
Front tally lamp dimly illuminated.  
PEAKING control  
Used to adjust the outlines of the video image in the  
viewfinder for easier focusing. This does not affect the signal  
output from the camera.  
CONTRAST control  
Used to adjust the contrast of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from the  
camera.  
Viewfinder left-right position anchoring ring  
Used to adjust the side-to-side position of the viewfinder.  
BRIGHT control  
Viewfinder front-back position anchoring lever  
Used to adjust the fore-and-aft position of the viewfinder.  
Used to adjust the brightness of the video image in the  
viewfinder. This does not affect the signal output from the  
camera.  
<Note>  
For more information, see the instruction manual for the  
viewfinder.  
Front tally lamp  
This lamp is activated when the  
TALLY switch is  
positioned at [HIGH] or [LOW], and stays on during  
recording. It also blinks in synchronisation with the REC  
lamp in the viewfinder, and provides alerts.  
Use the TALLY switch to change the intensity of the lamp to  
([HIGH] or [LOW]).  
21  
 
Chapter 3 Recording and Playback  
3-1  
P2 Cards  
Inserting P2 Cards  
3
Insert a P2 card into the P2 card slot until the EJECT button  
pops up.  
<Note>  
When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be sure to set  
the time data beforehand. On how the time data is set, see [4-5  
Setting Time Data].  
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
EJECT button  
The card must be  
inserted with the  
logo right way up.  
4
Tilt up the popped-up EJECT button, to lock-in the P2 card.  
POWER: ON  
P2 card  
LED  
2
While pressing down the slide lock button, slide the slide-  
out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
Slide lock  
button  
5
6
Insert a P2 card into the AJ-SPX800E. The P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED for the appropriate slot indicates the status  
of the P2 card.  
For how the P2 card status is indicated, see [P2 CARD  
STATUS LED and status of P2 cards] on the next page.  
Slide-out door  
Close the slide-out door.  
<Note>  
Do not leave the slide-out door open when moving the AJ-  
SPX800E.  
22  
   
Removing P2 Cards  
To Prevent Accidental Erasure of P2 Card Content  
To prevent the content of a P2 card being accidentally erased,  
position the write-protect switch on the P2 card at [Pprotect].  
1
While pressing down the slide lock button, move the slide-  
out door to the left.  
The door opens.  
<Note>  
Write-protect switchover can be performed while the card is  
being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not  
take effect until access to the card ceases.  
2
3
Tilt down the EJECT button.  
Then, depress the EJECT button to release the P2 card so  
that you can remove it.  
3
Protect  
Write-protect switch  
P2 CARD STATUS LED and status of P2 cards  
Tilt down the EJECT  
button.  
Depress the tilted-down  
EJECT button to release  
the P2 card.  
P2 CARD  
STATUS LED  
MODE CHECK  
indication*  
Status of P2 Card  
Stays on in green ACTIVE  
Writing and reading enabled  
Writing and reading enabled.  
The card is recordable (loop  
recording also enabled).  
<Notes>  
Stays on in  
ACTIVE  
orange  
z When a P2 card is being accessed or it is being recognised  
after insertion (P2 CARD ACCESS LED blinks in orange), do  
not remove the P2 card.  
If your AJ-SPX800E is not set to turn on the P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED, before removing the card ensure that pre-  
recording and/or voice memo recording have finished (the P-  
REC indication has stopped blinking and the V mark or VOICE  
REC indication on the viewfinder screen has turned off) after  
stopping recording or playback.  
z If a P2 card being accessed is removed, the viewfinder  
displays “TURN POWER OFF” and the AJ-SPX800E gives a  
warning using an alarm and the WARNING LED. In addition,  
all P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs blink rapidly in green. If this is the  
case, turn the power off. For more information on warning  
indications, see “7-3 Warning System”.  
z If a P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it may  
become irregular although the data will not be corrupted.  
Check the clips and restore them if required. For more  
information about how to restore clips, see “6-9 Restoring  
Clips”.  
Writing and reading enabled.  
However, some clips  
recorded on the P2 card may  
not be able to be read  
successfully.  
Stays on in  
ACTIVE !  
orange or green  
Writing or reading being  
performed.  
Blinks in orange  
ACCESSING  
Quickly blinks in  
green  
The P2 card is being  
recognised.  
INFO READING  
FULL  
The P2 card has no free  
space. Only reading is  
enabled.  
Blinks in green  
The write-protect switch on  
the P2 card is positioned at  
[PROTECT]. Only reading is  
enabled.  
PROTECTED  
The card is not supported by  
your AJ-SPX800E. Replace  
the card.  
NOT  
SUPPORTED  
Stays off  
The P2 card is not properly  
FORMAT ERROR formatted. Reformat the  
card.  
z If a P2 card being formatted is removed, it may be not be  
formatted properly. In this case, the viewfinder displays “TURN  
POWER OFF”. If this message appears, turn off the power,  
then restart the AJ-SPX800E to reformat the card.  
NO CARD  
No P2 card is inserted.  
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played  
back, the inserted P2 card is not recognised and the P2 CARD  
ACCESS LED for that card does not come on. Card  
recognition starts when the playback ends.  
* The mode check indication is shown in the viewfinder. For more  
information, see [4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout].  
<For Your Information>  
The P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs may be set to stay off using the  
menu option ACESS LED. This option can be found on the  
<SYSTEM MODE> screen, which is accessible from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
23  
   
Note that the recording order is retained even if the power is  
turned off. When the power is next turned on, the last card  
written before powering-down will be the target card.  
3-2  
Basic Procedures  
This section describes the basic procedure for shooting and  
recording.  
Before you embark on a shoot, pre-inspect your system to  
ensure that it works properly.  
Switch Setting  
* For directions on inspecting your video camera-recorder, see [7-1  
Inspections Before Shooting].  
When a battery and P2 cards are installed, set the switches as  
detailed below, before starting to use your AJ-SPX800E.  
Setting the switches before shooting and recording  
Battery Set-up to P2 card Insertion  
USER MAIN:  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH 1/CH 2:  
AUTO  
1
2
Insert a charged battery pack.  
This switch is factory-set to perform  
slot selection.  
Turn on the POWER switch and ensure that more than four  
segments of the battery-remaining amount indication bar  
are illuminated.  
z If the number of illuminated segments is fewer than five,  
first check the battery placement. If placement is not the  
problem, replace the battery with a fully charged one.  
TCG:  
F-RUN or  
R-RUN  
3
Insert a P2 card and ensure that the P2 CARD STATUS  
LED stays on in orange or green. Then, close the slide-out  
door.  
When more than one P2 card slot contains a P2 card, the  
card in the slot with the lowest number is used first.  
However, regardless of slot number, a P2 card inserted  
later will not be accessed until the other cards have been  
used.  
OUTPUT:  
CAM/AUTO KNEE ON  
GAIN:  
Normally, this should be set to 0 dB. If  
conditions are too dark, an appropriate  
gain level should be set.  
Iris: Auto  
Example:  
<Note>  
If all five slots contain P2 cards, the cards are used in order  
of slot numbers 1ꢀ2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5. However, if the P2 card in  
Slot 1 is removed and then re-inserted, the cards will be  
used in the following order: 2ꢀ3ꢀ4ꢀ5ꢀ1.  
The USER MAIN button is factory-set to perform the slot  
selection function, which selects the target card from among  
several P2 cards.  
When a new target P2 card is selected, the appropriate slot  
number appears on the P2 card remaining amount indicator in  
the viewfinder.  
For more information about the indications in the viewfinder, see  
[4-7-2 Viewfinder Status Indication Layout].  
2
2
1
3
5
4
3
2
1
24  
 
White/Black balance adjustment to recording completion  
Shooting  
White/Black Balance Adjustment to Recording  
Completion  
For shooting, follow the steps below.  
1
Select a filter according to light conditions.  
2AWhen the white balance is saved:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B].  
3
2B  
When the white or black balance is not saved and you  
have no time to adjust the white balance:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch to [PRST].  
3
1
4 5, 6 2C 2A, B, C  
This adjusts the white balance against the filter according  
to the position of the FILTER control.  
2C  
If the white balance is adjusted on the spot:  
Select a filter according to light conditions. Then, position  
the WHITE BAL switch to [A] or [B] and shoot a white test  
subject so that it appears at the centre of the screen. Then,  
follow the steps below to adjust the white balance.  
1. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to adjust  
the white balance.  
2. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [ABB] to adjust  
the black balance.  
3. Press the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward [AWB] to adjust  
the white balance again.  
For directions on making adjustments, see [4-1-1 Adjusting  
the White Balance] and [4-1-2 Adjusting the Black  
Balance].  
3
4
Point the camera at your subject to adjust the focus, and  
zoom.  
To use the electronic shutter, set the shutter speed and  
operation mode.  
For more information, see [4-2 Setting the Electronic  
Shutter].  
5
6
Press either the REC START/STOP button, REC button on  
the handle or VTR button at the lens to start recording.  
During recording, the REC lamp in the viewfinder stays  
illuminated.  
To stop recording, press either the REC START/STOP  
button, REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens.  
The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out.  
Operation Buttons  
During recording, all operation buttons (REW, FF, PLAY/  
PAUSE, STOP) are disabled.  
25  
3-3  
Normal Recording  
3-4  
PRE-RECORDING function  
Pressing either the REC START/STOP button, REC button on  
the handle or VTR button at the lens starts recording of video  
and sound on the P2 card.  
A cluster of data that consists of video and sound generated  
through a shooting action, together with such added information  
as a voice memo, is called a “clip”.  
The internal memory of your AJ-SPS800 is capable of storing  
several seconds of video and sound data coming from the  
camera. This capability can be used to record video and sound  
several seconds before either the REC START/STOP button,  
REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed  
to start recording.  
To use this capability, the storage duration of the internal  
memory must be set through the menu option PRE REC TIME.  
This option can be found in the <REC FUNCTION> screen on  
the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
<Note>  
Even if a P2 card has just been inserted, or the power has been  
just turned on, you can start recording using the internal  
memory of the AJ-SPX800E. In this case, recording cannot be  
stopped until the P2 card is recognised.  
These are the options for PRE REC TIME.  
0-15 SEC (for DVCPRO 25M or DV)  
0-8 SEC (for DVCPRO 50M):  
Specify the duration for which data may be recorded  
before either the REC START/STOP button, REC button  
on the handle or VTR button at the lens is pressed.  
However, if the AJ-SPX800E determines that the inserted P2  
card is non-recordable, the data in the internal memory will be  
deleted, with the message “CANNOT REC” appearing on the  
viewfinder screen. In this case, press the MODE CHECK button  
to check the status of the P2 CARD via the P2 CARD STATUS  
indication on the viewfinder screen.  
<Notes>  
z Immediately after the power is turned on, the menu option  
PRE REC TIME is selected and/or the storage duration is  
changed, the content in internal memory will be undefined. In  
these situations, the video or sound will not be recorded for  
the duration specified, even if either the REC START/STOP  
button, REC button on the handle or VTR button at the lens is  
pressed to start recording.  
z A P2 card that has been just inserted takes some time to  
recognise. In this situation, video or sound may not be  
recorded for the duration specified, even if either the REC  
START/STOP button, REC button on the handle, or VTR  
button at the lens is pressed to start a recording.  
Rec start/stop button  
Mode check button  
z The internal memory does not store video or sound when a  
playback or recording review is being performed. For this  
reason, no video or sound can be recorded during such  
operation.  
z When recording starts, the time code indication (TCG) may be  
shown as “HOLD” until the P2 card has been recognised.  
REC/PAUSE  
(Recording pauses)  
REC start  
(Recording starts)  
Real-time video  
Real-time sound  
A
B
C
Specified PRE-REC  
duration  
Previous clip  
Content on P2 card  
A
B
New clip  
26  
   
3-5  
Loop Recording  
3-6  
Recording Review Function  
When recording is paused, pressing the RET button  
automatically locates the last two seconds of video just  
recorded, and the viewfinder provides video playback.  
After playback, the video camera-recorder is again ready to start  
recording.  
The picture location/playback duration can be increased to up to  
10 seconds by continuously pressing the RET button. For short  
clips, however, when the start of a clip is located, continuously  
pressing the RET button does not play back any clips before that  
clip.  
The function of the RET button may be assigned to a desired  
user button by using one of the menu options USER MAIN SW,  
USER1 SW or USER2 SW. These options can be found in the  
<USER SW> screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
When recording is paused, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button  
plays back the last recorded clip, from the beginning. After  
completion of playback, the camera-recorder enters the stopped  
state.  
When two or more P2 card slots contain cards, this function  
allows the target P2 card to be switched in order. Even when the  
free space of a P2 card is used up, this function continues  
recording while erasing existing data.  
To use this function, the menu option LOOP REC MODE must  
be set to “ON” The option LOOP REC MODE can be found in  
the <REC FUNCTION< screen on the SYSTEM SETTINGS  
page.  
3
Card1  
Card2  
Card3  
Before loop  
recording starts  
Content  
recorded  
No content  
Recording starts  
Recording Cycle 1  
B
B
C
C
A
Recording Cycle 2  
D
<Note>  
When the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel is positioned  
at [MEM], the video for REC REVIEW is output from the video  
output connectors (VIDEO OUT and MON OUT connectors),  
and also to the viewfinder.  
Note that when a backup device is connected to back up the  
video the pictures for REC REVIEW are backed up.  
The data is recorded in the free space of each P2 card (in order of A  
ꢀ B ꢀ C). When the free space is used up, the content on A is  
erased to perform a new recording on D.  
<Note>  
z When the loop recording capability is used, each P2 card must  
have at least one minute of free space.  
z During loop recording, the P2 CARD ACCESS LEDs for all  
target P2 cards illuminate in orange. Note that if any of the  
target P2 card is removed, loop recording stops.  
Recording pauses  
Recording starts  
z When the menu option LOOP REC MODE is set to ON, the  
viewfinder and display window both show “LOOP”.  
However, when only one card is inserted, or when each card  
has less than one minute of free space, the loop recording  
capability does not work, even if the option LOOP REC MODE  
is set to ON. If this is the case, the indication “LOOP” flashes  
in the viewfinder and on the display window.  
2-10 Seconds  
Recorded clip  
The PLAY button plays back  
the clip from the beginning.  
The RET button puts  
the video camera-  
recorder into REC  
REVIEW mode.  
Terminating the Loop Recording Mode  
You can terminate the loop recording mode by either:  
z Turning off the POWER switch of the AJ-SPX800E; or  
z Setting the menu option LOOP REC MODE to “OFF”.  
27  
   
3-7  
Normal and Variable Speed 3-8  
Playback  
Voice Memo Function  
A voice memo is voice data which can be added to a clip  
independently of the normal sound data recorded in the clip.  
Voice memos may recorded during recording or playback, or  
when recording or playback is paused. They can be played back  
in thumbnail display mode.  
The PLAY/PAUSE button provides monochrome playback  
through the viewfinder and colour playback on the LCD monitor.  
A colour video monitor connected to the VIDEO OUT or MON  
OUT connector of the AJ-SPX800E also provides colour  
playback.  
<Note>  
When the extension board AJ-YA902AG is attached, the VIDEO  
OUT connector outputs an SDI playback (to view the playback,  
the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel must be positioned to  
[MEM]).  
Each clip can accommodate up to 100 voice memos.  
If the menu option VOICE MEMO RESERVE is set to “ON”, you  
can record at least 10 minutes of voice memos for each P2 card  
while clip recording is paused or after recording ends.  
Variable speed playback  
Recording a Voice Memo  
The FF and REW buttons provide 32C and 4C fast playbacks  
and fast reverse playbacks.  
When playback is paused, the FF button locates the beginning  
of the next clip while maintaining the pause mode.  
When playback is paused, the REW button locates the  
beginning of the current clip while maintaining the pause mode.  
To add a voice memo to a clip during recording or playback, or  
when recording or playback is paused, press the VOICE MEMO  
button. A voice memo may be recorded using the voice memo  
microphone. Another press of the button stops recording of the  
voice memo.  
<Notes>  
z When a P2 card has been just removed or inserted, or when  
the power has been just turned on for playback, it may take  
some time for the AJ-SPX800E to read clip information. If this  
is the case, the viewfinder displays “UPDATING”.  
z If a P2 card is inserted while another P2 card is being played  
back, the clips on the inserted P2 card will not be played back.  
A P2 card inserted during playback will be recognised after  
playback ends.  
z If you perform variable speed playback on a clip split across  
more than one P2 card, sound may disappear for a moment.  
This is not a fault.  
Voicememo  
microphone  
VOICE MEMO button  
<Notes>  
z Voice memos can also be recorded when the LCD monitor is  
in thumbnail mode. For more information, see [6-7-2  
Recording a Voice Memo].  
z Voice memos cannot be recorded when colour bars are being  
output, video input through the GENLOCK IN connector is  
being recorded, or loop recording is being performed.  
z During voice memo recording, turn down the speaker volume  
to prevent the voice memo microphone from picking up sound  
from the speakers of the AJ-SPX800E.  
z When voice memo recording is performed during recording/  
playback of  
a
clip, the voice memo recording also  
automatically ends when recording/playback of the clip ends.  
Also, when voice memo recording is performed during  
playback of a clip, playback of the clip also automatically ends  
when the voice memo recording is ended by pressing the  
VOICE MEMO button.  
28  
     
Associating Voice Memos with a Clip  
The portion of the clip with which a voice memo is associated  
3-9  
Shot Mark Function  
depends on when the voice memo is recorded.  
A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of a clip to distinguish that  
clip from others. With the LCD monitor, only clips that have shot  
marks can be viewed and/or played back.  
A voice memo recorded during recording or playback is  
associated with the picture in view at the time the VOICE MEMO  
button is pressed. A voice memo recorded when recording is  
paused is associated with the beginning picture of the  
immediately preceding clip. A voice memo recorded when  
playback is paused is associated with the still picture in view at  
the time the VOICE MEMO button is pressed.  
Adding Shot Marks  
To add a shot mark during recording, press the SHOT MARK  
button. The viewfinder displays “MARK ON” and adds a shot  
mark to the thumbnail of the appropriate clip. Another press of  
the button erases the shot mark.  
3
Recording or  
Clip being recorded  
playback  
Recording  
Recorded clip  
paused  
Playback  
Clip being played back  
paused  
SHOT MARK  
button  
Voice memo  
Shot marks may also be added or erased using clip thumbnails.  
For more information, see [6-6 Shot Mark].  
Voice memo recording starts  
<Note>  
<Note>  
When, with PRE RECORDING executed, a voice memo is  
recorded, the voice memo may be associated with a picture in  
view prior to point when the VOICE MEMO button is pressed.  
Shot marks cannot be added or deleted when colour bars are  
being output, or when video input through the GENLOCK IN  
connector is being recorded.  
Playing Back and Deleting Voice Memos  
For information on how to play back and delete voice memos,  
see [6-7-1 Playing Back Voice Memos] and [6-7-3 Deleting Voice  
Memos].  
29  
   
Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording  
To record high-quality video with the AJ-SPX800E, the black and  
white balances must be adjusted according to conditions.  
For higher quality, it is recommended that the adjustments  
should be made in this order AWB (white balance adjustment)  
ꢀ ABB (black balance adjustment) ꢀ AWB (white balance  
adjustment).  
3
Place a white pattern at a point where the light conditions  
match those for the light source of the subject. Then zoom-  
in on the white pattern so that white colour appears in the  
screen. A white object (cloth or wall) may be used instead  
of a white pattern.  
The illustration below shows the required size for the white  
space.  
4-1  
Adjusting the White balance  
and Black Balance  
<Note>  
z Do not include a high-intensity spot in the screen.  
z The white object must appear at the centre of the screen.  
4-1-1  
Adjusting the White Balance  
1/4 or more of the screen in width  
Whenever light conditions change, the white balance must be re-  
adjusted.  
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps below.  
1/4 or more of the  
screen in height  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
CC/ND FILTER control  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
Flip up the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned at  
[AWB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the white  
balance automatically adjusted.  
<Notes>  
To cancel automatic white balance adjustment in process  
(the viewfinder displays “AWB ACTIVE”), re-position the  
AUTO W/B BAL switch at [AWB].  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
6
7
During an adjustment, the viewfinder displays the following  
message:  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
OUTPUT: CAM  
GAIN:Under normal conditions, set to 0 dB  
If it is too dark, an appropriate gain  
should be set.  
AUTO W/B BAL  
switch:  
Used to perform AWB.  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$&7,9(  
2
Adjust the CC/ND FILTER control according to the light  
conditions.  
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds, and the  
following message will appear:  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the memory  
specified in Step 1 ([A] or [B]).  
<Note>  
For examples of CC/ND FILTER adjustments, see [2-4  
Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions Section].  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$ꢀ2.ꢀꢁꢂꢃ.  
8
For the 3200K CC/ND filter, if the subject’s colour  
temperature is lower than 2300K or higher than 9900K the  
following message appears:  
If the arrow points down (ꢁ) the actual colour temperature  
is lower than the temperature indicated. If the arrow points  
up (ꢂ) the actual temperature is higher than the  
temperature indicated.  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$:%ꢀ$ꢀ2.ꢀꢃꢂꢁ.ꢃꢁ  
30  
       
Detection area for the white balance  
Retaining white balances  
The detection area for the white balance is selectable between  
90%, 50% and 25%, using the menu option AWB AREA.  
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
The detection area is factory-set to 25%.  
Each value in memory is retained even if the video camera-  
recorder is turned off; it will not be lost until the white balance is  
re-adjusted. White balances are stored in either of two systems:  
A or B.  
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “ON” (default), each  
system stores only one value. If this is the case, the values are  
not synchronised with the filters.  
This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
When the menu option FILTER INH is set to “OFF”, the adjusted  
value for each filter can be automatically stored in the memory  
that corresponds to the position of the WHITE BAL switch (A or  
B). Your AJ-SPX800E has four built-in filters; it stores eight (4 C  
2) adjusted values.  
90%  
50%  
25%  
4
Note that, when the menu options AWB A and AWB B are set to  
“VAR”, the colour temperatures specified through COLOR TEMP  
A and COLOR TEMP B are used, meaning that the white  
balances cannot be adjusted with the AWB switch. The menu  
options are found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE> screen,  
which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
When you have no time to adjust the white balance:  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
This adjusts the white balance for the filter according to the  
position of the CC/ND FILTER control.  
Setting the auto-tracking white balance (ATW)  
When the white balance has not been automatically  
adjusted:  
The AJ-SPX800E has an auto-tracking white balance (ATW)  
feature that automatically tracks the white balance for pictures  
according to lighting conditions.  
The ATW feature can be assigned to Position [B] of the WHITE  
BAL switch. To do so, the menu option AWB B must be set to  
“ATW”. This option can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE  
MODE CAM> screen, which is accessible from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted, the  
viewfinder displays an error message.  
If one of the error messages listed below appears, take the  
appropriate steps, then adjust the white balance again.  
If the error message appears after repeated readjustments, the  
interior of the unit must be inspected. For more information,  
contact a service centre or your distributor.  
The ATW feature may be assigned to the USER MAIN, USER1,  
or USER2 button. For more information, see [4-9-4 Assigning  
Functions to USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2 Buttons].  
Error message  
Description  
The colour  
temperature is too  
high.  
Remedies  
COLOR TEMP.  
HIGH  
Select an appropriate  
filter.  
To cancel the auto-tracking white balance:  
Press the user button that has the ATW feature assigned, or  
change the position of the WHITE BAL switch. Note that, when  
the ATW feature is assigned to [B] of the WHITE BAL switch, the  
auto-tracking white balance cannot be cancelled with a user  
button.  
COLOR TEMP.  
LOW  
The colour  
temperature is too  
low.  
Select an appropriate  
filter.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is insufficient Increase the light level or  
light.  
gain.  
LEVEL OVER  
CHECK FILTER  
TIME OVER  
There is too much  
light.  
Decrease the light level or  
gain.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀ,1+ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+2&./(66ꢀ$:%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃꢆꢇ  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ ꢀ$%%ꢀ2))6(7ꢀꢀꢅ2))  
The FILTER control Check the FILTER  
is displaced.  
control.  
AWB was not  
completed within  
the time allowed.  
Shooting conditions may  
be unstable. If flicker  
occurs, press the shutter  
and readjust the AWB  
under stable conditions.  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ35(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$7:ꢀ63(('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
<Note>  
This function does not guarantee 100% accuracy of the white  
balance.  
When using the AJ-SPX800E, remember that there will be some  
allowance in the trackability of changes in lighting conditions and  
pull-in accuracy of white balances.  
Viewfinder displays related to white balance  
See [4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays].  
31  
<Notes>  
4-1-2  
Adjusting the Black Balance  
z Ensure that the lens connector is connected and the lens  
iris is CLOSE.  
The black balance must be adjusted when:  
z During a black balance adjustment, light is automatically  
cut off.  
z During a black balance adjustment, the gain switchover  
circuit is automatically switched.  
The viewfinder screen may flicker and/or display noise;  
this is not a failure.  
z You use your AJ-SPX800E the first time;  
z Your AJ-SPX800E has not been used for some time;  
z The ambient temperature has changed substantially;  
z The gain switchover value has been changed; or  
z S.GAIN (super gain) has been set with the USER MAIN/  
USER1/USER2 button.  
z If you find the black shading annoying after performing an  
auto black balance adjustment, adjust the black shading.  
To do so, go to the menu option DETECTION, move the  
cursor (ꢀ), then press the JOG dial button. The menu  
option DETECTION can be found in the <BLACK  
SHADING> screen, which is accessible from the  
MAINTENANCE page.  
1
Set the switches as illustrated below.  
Note that pressing the ABB switch for longer than five  
seconds automatically performs an auto black balance  
adjustment, followed by an automatic black shading  
adjustment. (For more information, see the menu option  
SHD. ABB SW CTL in [8-5-5 SW MODE].)  
z To cancel the automatic black balance adjustment in  
process (the viewfinder displays “ABB ACTIVE”), flip the  
AUTO W/B BAL switch down to [ABB] again.  
If automatic adjustment is cancelled, the value in effect  
before automatic adjustment will be used.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch:  
Used to perform ABB.  
OUTPUT: CAM  
Retaining black balances  
2
3
Tilt the AUTO W/B BAL switch so that it is positioned at  
[ABB], then release it.  
The switch returns to the central position with the black  
balance automatically adjusted.  
Each value in memory is retained even if the video camera-  
recorder is turned off.  
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays the following  
message:  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$%%ꢀ$&7,9(  
<Note>  
During adjustment, the lens iris automatically becomes  
CLOSE.  
4
The adjustment will take effect in a few seconds and the  
following message will appear:  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
$%%ꢀ2.  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in the memory.  
32  
   
4-2  
Setting the Electronic Shutter  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6+877(5ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀ!  
This section provides a description of the electronic shutter,  
together with setting and handling directions.  
ꢀ683(5ꢀ9ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢅ)50ꢉ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢉꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢋꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢃꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢉꢃꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢁꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢃꢆꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢊꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢆꢈꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢆꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢉꢈꢈꢈ  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢋꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢅꢉꢌꢃꢈꢈꢈ  
4-2-1  
Shutter Modes  
The table below shows the shutter modes and speeds for the  
electronic shutter provided in your AJ-SPX800E.  
Mode  
Normal  
Shutter speed  
Application  
1
Press the SHUTTER switch, positioned at [ON], towards  
[SEL].  
POSISTIONS 1-6 Used to capture clear images  
of a fast-moving subject  
4
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
Range of 50.4 Hz Used to reduce the effect of  
to 248.0 Hz (50i) horizontal lines when  
shooting a monitor screen  
Range of 25.0 Hz  
that has a vertical scanning  
to 248.0 Hz (25P)  
frequency of more than 50 Hz  
SUPER V  
Used to enhance vertical  
resolution  
<Notes>  
z In any mode, the higher the shutter speed the lower the  
sensitivity of the camera.  
z When the iris is automatically adjusted, the higher the shutter  
speed the larger the iris, and the shorter the depth of focus.  
SHUTTER switch  
4-2-2  
Setting the Shutter Mode and Speed  
2
Once more, press the SHUTTER switch towards [SEL].  
Repeat this switchover until the desired mode or speed  
appears in the viewfinder screen.  
The shutter speed in any shutter mode is set using the  
SHUTTER switch.  
If all modes and speeds are available, the display changes  
in the following order:  
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, shutter speed can be switched  
easily, using the synchro-scan adjustment switches (+/–) on the  
side panel.  
Note that the range of selectable shutter speeds may be pre-  
defined; whether or not to use the SYNCHRO SCAN and  
SUPER V modes may be determined through the <SHUTTER  
SPEED> and <SHUTTER SELECT> screens. These screens  
are accessible through the menu on the CAM OPERATION  
page.  
NORMAL mode  
1/60  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
SUPER V  
mode  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN mode  
The selected shutter speed is retained even if the AJ-SPX800E  
is turned off.  
<Note>  
Your AJ-SPX800E is not factory-set to display the SUPER  
V mode on the viewfinder screen. To display this mode, set  
the menu option SUPER V found in the <SHUTTER  
SPEED> screen, which is accessible from the CAM  
OPERATION page, to “ON”.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6+877(5ꢀ63(('ꢀ!  
ꢀ6<1&+52ꢀ6&$1ꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ683(5ꢀ9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢆꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ326,7,21ꢋꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Viewfinder displays relating to the shutter  
See [4-7 Viewfinder Screen Status Displays].  
33  
       
4-2-3  
Placing the Camera-recorder in  
SYNCHRO SCAN Mode  
4-3  
Selecting Recording Signals  
and Recording System  
To place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN mode, follow  
the steps below.  
The AJ-SPX800E is capable of utilising user-selected recording  
signals and format.  
1
Press the SHUTTER switch positioned at [ON] towards  
[SEL], to place the camera-recorder in SYNCHRO SCAN  
mode.  
4-3-1  
Selecting the Recording Signals.  
Signals to be recorded are selected through the menu options  
REC SIGNAL and CAMERA MODE. These options are found in  
the <SYSYTEM MODE> screen, which is accessible from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons (+/–)  
ꢄ
ޓ
ޓ
ꢄꢀ6<67(0ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ6,*1$/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ&$0  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈJ  
ꢀ9ꢂ5(6ꢍꢃꢆ3ꢎꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ,175/&(  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈ0  
ꢀ$63(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢊꢅꢁ  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ7$//<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ5('  
ꢀ$&&(66ꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Setting options and usage  
The option REC SIGNAL is used to select signals to be  
recorded.  
SHUTTER switch  
CAM:  
Signals from the camera are recorded.  
VIDEO: Signals from the GENLOCK IN connector are  
recorded.  
2
In SYNCHRO SCAN mode, the speed can be switched  
seamlessly between 1/50.4 and 1/248.0 seconds, using the  
SYNCHRO SCAN ADJUSTMENT buttons (+/–). (Speed  
switchover is enabled in 50i mode.)  
1394:  
Signals from the DVCPRO/DV connector are  
recorded. (when the optional board 1394 is  
attached).  
The option CAMERA MODE is used to specify the operation  
mode of the camera. (effective when the menu option REC  
SIGNAL is set to “CAM”).  
50i:  
25P:  
AJ-SPX800E camera unit operates in 50i mode.  
AJ-SPX800E camera unit operates in 25P mode.  
To operate the camera in 25P mode, the vertical resolution mode  
must be selected through the menu option V.RES (25P).  
(effective when the menu option REC SIGNAL is set to “CAM”).  
INTRLCE: Line-mixed, natural video is recorded. This option  
is used to handle material that uses a standard  
interlaced signal.  
PROG.: Non line-mixed, fully progressive, segmented-  
frame video is recorded. This option is used when  
HD conversion is performed, or when an editor  
and/or display output progressive signals.  
Note that in progressive (25P) mode signals recorded on P2  
cards are also converted from progressive scan (25P) to  
interlaced scan (50i).  
34  
     
4-4  
Selecting Audio Input Signals and  
Adjusting Recording Levels  
<Note>  
z When “VIDEO” is selected for the menu option REC SIGNAL,  
non-standard signals output from the GENLOCK IN connector,  
may degrade video quality.  
In any format (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO or DV), the AJ-SPX800E  
supports independent four-channel audio recording.  
z When “PROG.” is specified for the menu option V.RES (25P),  
segmented-frame video is recorded, allowing you to perform  
completely progressive editing. However, adding vertical  
details (V.DTL) can makes the video appear unnatural. For  
these reasons, it is recommended that V.DTL be set to 0.  
z In progressive mode, 50 percent shutter is forcibly added to  
produce more film-like motion video. To cancel this shutter, go  
to the <OPTION> screen from the OPTION menu and set the  
option P HALF SHUT to “OFF”.  
When the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch is positioned at  
[AUTO], the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2 are  
automatically adjusted. To manually adjust the recording levels,  
position the switch at [MAN]. Note that the recording levels for  
Audio Channels 3 and 4 are selected through a menu option.  
4-4-1  
Selecting Audio Input Signals  
4
The input signals to be recorded on Audio Channels 1, 2, 3, and  
4 are selected with the AUDIO IN switch. For more information,  
see [2-2 Audio (input) Function Section].  
4-3-2  
Selecting the Recording System  
The recording format is selected through the option menu REC  
MODE.  
The aspect ratio is selected through the menu option ASPECT.  
These options are found in the <SYSYTEM MODE> screen,  
which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH1/CH2 switch  
Details of the option REC MODE  
Display window  
50M:  
25M:  
DV:  
Video is recorded in the DVCPRO50 format (50  
Mbps).  
Video is recorded in the DVCPRO format (25  
Mbps).  
Video is recorded in the DV format.  
MONITOR CH1/3  
/ ST / CH2/4  
selector switch  
Details of the option ASPECT  
MONITORSELECT  
CH1/2 / CH3/4  
selector switch  
16:9:  
4:3:  
Video is recorded with an aspect ratio of 16:9.  
Video is recorded with an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
AUDIO LEVEL  
CH1/CH2 controls  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/  
CH3/CH4 buttons  
Your AJ-SPX800E is factory-set to perform no recording on  
Audio Channels 3 and 4 in the DVCPRO and DV formats. To  
enable four-channel recording, the menu option 25M REC CH  
SEL must be set to “4CH”.  
The following table shows audio signals recorded on Audio  
Channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings for menu options  
REC CH3/4 and 25M REC CH SEL.  
These options are found in the MIC/AUDIO1 screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page:  
Recording on CH3/4  
25M REC  
REC CH3/4  
CH SEL  
DVCPRO50  
format  
DVCPRO or  
DV format  
options  
options  
No recording is  
performed.  
2CH  
Audio signals  
selected with the  
AUDIO IN CH3/  
CH4 switch are  
recorded.  
Audio signals selected  
with the AUDIO IN  
CH3/CH4 switch are  
recorded.  
SW  
4CH  
2CH  
No recording is  
performed.  
Signals for Audio  
Channel 1 are also  
recorded on Audio  
Channel 3, and  
signals for Audio  
Channel 4 are also  
recorded on Audio  
Channel 2.  
Signals for Audio  
Channel 1 are also  
recorded on Audio  
Channel 3, and signals  
for Audio Channel 4 are  
also recorded on Audio  
Channel 2.  
CH1/2  
4CH  
35  
     
<Note>  
3
While checking the audio channel level meter in the display  
window or the audio level meter in the viewfinder, adjust the  
AUDIO LEVEL CH1/CH2 control.  
Note that if the level exceeds the top bar (0 dB), the word  
OVER illuminates to show that the input level is excessive.  
The adjustment made in such a way that the maximum level  
will not reach the 0 dB bar.  
z Audio Channels 1 and 2 always receive the signals selected  
with the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches.  
z When the extension board AJ-YA902AG (optional accessory)  
is attached, 4-channel recorded audio signals are SDI-output,  
as is.  
Specific audio settings are performed through the <MIC/  
AUDIO1> and <MIC/AUDIO2> screens, which are accessible  
from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Audio level meter on the display window  
For more information, see [8-6 MAIN OPERATION].  
OVER  
SLAVE HOLD W  
GPS  
DV  
0
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢉꢀ!  
CTL VTCG TIMEDATE P- REC  
10  
20  
30  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ$872ꢀ/(9(/ꢀ&+ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$872ꢀ/(9(/ꢀ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢁꢌ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6:  
ꢀꢃꢆ0ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ&+  
ꢀ7(67ꢀ721(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
h
Y
minM  
s
D
frm  
E
E
F
F
MEDIA  
BATT  
40  
OO  
-dB  
LOOP DRIVE OP-SLOT  
1
2
Audio level meter in the viewfinder  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢃꢀ!  
F:1----w  
R:2----w---+  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ0,&ꢀ32:(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ32:(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ021,725ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ67(5(2  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ0,&ꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢊꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ&+ꢉꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢅꢏꢋꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ0,&ꢀ&+ꢃꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢅꢏꢋꢈE%  
ꢀ5($5ꢀ/,1(ꢀ,1ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢊE%  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ287ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢊE%  
ꢀ+($'5220ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉꢑE%  
ꢀ:,5(/(66ꢀ:$51ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
When operating the AJ-SPX800E without a sound recordist, it is  
recommended that the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control should be  
used to adjust the audio level.  
In advance, check the level meter in the viewfinder screen and  
use the AUDIO LEVEL control to adjust the appropriate audio  
channel so that no excessive audio signals will be admitted.  
4-4-3  
CH3 and CH4 Recording Levels  
4-4-2  
Adjusting Recording Levels  
The following table shows the effects on the recording level for  
Audio Channels 3 and 4 that depend on the settings and input  
levels specified through the menu options AUTO LEVEL CH3  
and AUTO LEVEL CH4. Note that the recording level cannot be  
adjusted manually.  
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1 and 2, follow  
the steps below.  
1
Position the MONITOR SELECT CH1/2 / CH3/4-selector  
switch at CH1/2 so that the audio level meter on the display  
window will provide CH1 and CH2 indications. Ensure that  
the channel indications displayed in the window are 1 and  
2.  
These options are found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Input level  
AUTO LEVEL  
Whether to enable or disable the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL  
control must be preset through menu options FRONT VR  
CH1 and FRONT VR CH2. Note that this control is factory-  
disabled.  
The menu options are found in the MIC/AUDIO1 screen,  
which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
CH3/CH4  
LINE  
MIC  
ON  
AGC ON  
AGC/LIMITER OFF  
AGC ON  
LIMITER ON  
OFF  
2
Position the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 switch at [MAN].  
36  
   
Card continuity provided by the user's bit  
4-5  
Setting Time Data  
If the menu option UB MODE is set to “REGEN”, the AJ-  
SPX800E reads the user bits in the last frame of the last clip  
recorded on a P2 card (clip with the most recent recording date  
and time), and records that bit onto the next card. Note that  
settings for the user bits are not recorded.  
4-5-1  
Setting the User Bits  
The user bits allow information, including memos that use up to  
eight-digit base 16 numbers (date and time), to be recorded in  
the secondary code area.  
The menu option UB MODE can be found in the <TC/UB>  
screen, which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
HOLD switch  
<Note>  
DISPLAY switch  
The AJ-SPX800E also records the time code and user bits in the  
VIDEO AUX area. The value for the time code (VITC) is the  
same as that of the time code (LTC) in the secondary code area.  
The user bits (of VITC) also records special information,  
including the shoting frame rate.  
4
Display  
window  
User bits of VITC  
__ꢅꢈ)ꢅꢆꢈꢅꢃ  
_
Card management data  
z Frame update flag  
z Recording start/stop mark  
Fixed value  
Verification  
TCG switch  
information on  
the right-hand  
six digits  
Camera shooting mode  
CURSOR and SET buttons  
50i:  
502  
25A  
25P:  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
When the left digit starts blinking you can change the value.  
3
Use CURSOR buttons to set the user bits.  
ꢀ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
ꢁ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
ꢂ button: Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
ꢃꢄbutton: Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
4
5
Position the TCG at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN].  
Go to the <TC/UB> screen from the MAIN OPERATION  
page, and set the menu option UB MODE to “USER”.  
<Note>  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails  
cannot be manipulated.  
Retaining the user bits  
The data set for the user bits are automatically saved and  
retained even if the video camera-recorder is turned off.  
37  
       
4-5-2  
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and  
Time  
Time  
difference  
Time  
difference  
Area  
Area  
00:00 Greenwich  
– 00:30  
– 01:30  
– 02:30  
1
2
Position the DISPLAY switch at [UB].  
– 01:00 Azores Islands  
– 02:00 Mid-Atlantic  
– 03:00 Buenos Aires  
– 04:00 Halifax  
Press the HOLD button to display a date in the display  
window.  
– 03:30 Newfoundland Island  
– 04:30  
3
4
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
Use the CURSOR and SET buttons to set the year, month  
and day (Y/M/D).  
Note that any later than 2030 cannot be set.  
– 05:00 New York  
– 06:00 Chicago  
– 07:00 Denver  
– 05:30  
– 06:30  
– 07:30  
5
6
7
Press the HOLD button to display a time in the display  
window.  
– 08:00 Los Angeles  
– 09:00 Alaska  
– 08:30  
– 09:30 Marquesas Islands  
– 10:30  
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the hour, minute and  
second (h/min/s).  
– 10:00 Hawaii  
– 11:00 Midway Island  
– 12:00 Kwajalein  
+ 13:00  
-– 11:30  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN]. The  
internal clock starts at the moment the switch position is  
changed.  
+ 11:30 Norfolk Island  
+ 10:30 Lord Howe Island  
+ 09:30 Darwin  
+ 08:30  
+ 12:00 New Zealand  
+ 11:00 Solomon Islands  
+ 10:00 Guam  
8
Press the HOLD button to display a time zone (time  
difference between local time and Greenwich Mean Time)  
in the display window.  
+ 07:30  
+ 09:00 Tokyo  
+ 06:30 Rangoon  
+ 05:30 Bombay  
+ 04:30 Kabul  
+ 03:30 Tehran  
+ 02:30  
9
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
+ 08:00 Beijing  
10  
Use the ꢂ and ꢃ buttons to set the desired hours and  
minutes ahead of (no sign) or behind (– sign) the  
Greenwich Mean Time).  
+ 07:00 Bangkok  
+ 06:00 Dacca  
Example: If the local time is five hours behind Greenwich  
Mean Time,  
set the time zone to “5:00 –”.  
+ 05:00 Islamabad  
+ 04:00 Abu Dhabi  
+ 03:00 Moscow  
+ 02:00 Eastern Europe  
+ 01:00 Central Europe  
+ 01:30  
+ 00:30  
The time zone is always recorded, together with the date  
and time, as metadata.  
See the table at right to set the time zone according to your  
local time.  
+ 12:45 Chatham Islands  
<Notes>  
11  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN] or [R-RUN] to accept  
the time zone.  
z In Step 4, if the TCG switch is positioned at [F-RUN] or [R-  
RUN], this also activate the internal clock.  
To cancel date, time and time zone settings in process, hold  
down the SET button and position the TCG switch at [F-RUN]  
or [R-RUN].  
<Notes>  
z When using the camera-recorder for the first time, be  
sure to perform this setting beforehand. Do not change  
the setting during use of the camera-recorder.  
z When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails  
cannot be manipulated.  
z Clock accuracy fluctuates between about  
30 seconds per  
month when the power is turned off. If more accurate  
timekeeping is required, check the time when the power is  
turned on and, if necessary, reset the clock.  
When the GPS unit AJ-GPS900G is installed, and if it  
successfully receives time information, the internal clock  
keeps accurate (local) time based on the received time  
(Greenwich Mean Time) and the time zone. If the date and  
time differ from the actual local time, the time zone may not be  
set correctly. Check again, to see if the time zone is set  
correctly. (The date and time need not be set again.)  
38  
   
4-5-3  
Setting the Time Code  
4-5-4  
Externally Locking the Time Code  
1
2
3
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
The time code generator built into your AJ-SPX800E may be  
locked with an external generator. It is also possible to lock an  
external time code generator with the internal generator.  
Position the TCG switch at [SET].  
Use the CURSOR buttons to set the time code.  
The time code setting range extends from 00:00:00:00 to  
23:59:59:24.  
Connections for externally locking the time code  
(examples)  
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and the time code  
must be input.  
ꢀ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the right.  
ꢁ button: Shifts the target (blinking) digit to the left.  
ꢂ button: Advances the blinking number by one digit.  
ꢃꢄbutton: Winds back the blinking number by one digit.  
Example 1ꢀ Locking the time code with external signals  
4
4
Change the position of the TCG switch.  
[F-RUN] steps the time code in free run mode, and [R-RUN]  
set it in recording run mode.  
TC IN  
Reference  
time code  
<Note>  
When the TCG switch is positioned at [SET], thumbnails  
cannot be manipulated.  
Reference  
video signal  
GENLOCK IN  
Example 2ꢀ Connecting two or more AJ-SPX800Es with one  
another, with one being used as the reference  
device.  
Regeneration of Time Code  
When the menu option FIRST REC TC is set to “REGEN”, the  
AJ-SPX800E reads the time code recorded in the last frame on  
the last recorded clip (with the most recent recording date and  
time) to maintain and record that value. The menu option FIRST  
REC TC can be found on the <TC/UB> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Reference device  
<Note>  
MON OUT  
TC OUT  
However, when a P2 card is inserted or removed or when the  
recording target P2 card is changed using the SLOT SEL  
function of the USER button, the time code for the last recorded  
clip is recorded on the new recording target P2 card. When there  
is no recorded clip, the time code is recorded on the new  
recording target P2 card, from the value generated by the TC  
generator built into the camera-recorder  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
MON OUT  
TC OUT  
Time code function during battery replacement.  
Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism keeps  
the time code generator functioning for a considerable time  
(about one year).  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
<Note>  
MON OUT  
TC OUT  
When the POWER switch has been switched ON ꢄꢃOFF ꢄꢃON,  
the backup accuracy of the time code in free run mode is about  
2 frames.  
Different camera  
39  
     
To externally lock the time code:  
<Notes>  
Follow the steps below.  
z To externally lock the AJ-SPX800E, as the master device, with  
more than one unit, the mode must be the same as that of the  
camera. Note that in a system using both interlaced and  
progressive scanning, there may be breaks in the video and  
time code.  
z When using the MON OUT connector to output reference  
signals, position the OUTPUT SEL switch on the side panel at  
[CAM].  
1
2
3
4
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Position the TCG switch at [F-RUN].  
Position the DISPLAY switch at [TC].  
Set the menu option GENLOCK to “EXT”.  
This option can be found in the <GENLOCK> screen, which  
is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
5
Supply a phase-relationship reference time code (that  
conforms to the time code requirements) and reference  
video signals to the TC IN and GENLOCK IN connectors,  
respectively.  
Now the built-in time code generator is locked with the reference  
time code.  
From about 10 seconds after locking the time code generator  
stays locked even if the supply of external reference time code is  
discontinued.  
<Note>  
When the time code generator is externally locked, the time  
code instantly becomes locked with the external time code, and  
the counter displays the external time code value. Do not put the  
AJ-SPX800E in recording mode before the sync generator  
stabilises.  
Setting the user bits when the time code is externally  
locked  
When the time code is externally locked only time data is locked  
with the time data of the external time code.  
This means that the user bits may be set separately for each  
camera-recorder.  
When “EXT” is specified for the menu option UB MODE, the  
user bits is also locked with the user bits of the external time  
code.  
The menu option UB MODE can be found in the <TC/UB>  
screen, which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
To unlock the externally locked time code:  
Discontinue external time code supply, then position the TCG  
switch at [R-RUN].  
Cautions in switching the power source from battery  
to external power supply  
Connect the DC IN socket with the external power supply before  
removing the battery pack, in order to keep the time code  
generator energised. If the battery pack is removed first, there is  
no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.  
External synchronisation of the camera when the time  
code is externally locked  
When the time code is externally locked, the reference video  
signals input through the GENLOCK IN connector gen-lock the  
camera.  
40  
4-5-5  
Providing an ID to the Camera  
4-5-6  
Setting UMID Information  
The camera ID is specified through the <CAMERA ID> screen.  
The ID can include up to 10 alphanumeric characters, symbols,  
and/or spaces.  
The AJ-SPX800E supports UMID metadata. You need to specify  
as UMID information the country where you live (using up to  
three characters), organisation or company (up to four  
characters) and user name (up to four characters). For the  
country name, you must use abbreviations prescribed in the  
ISO3166 Country Code* .  
Here are some examples of the correct method for specifying a  
user name:  
<Note>  
When the settings menu is displayed, outputting colour bar  
signals does not indicate the camera ID.  
1
1
Go to the <CAMERA ID> screen from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
*1 Examples: China  
CHN  
U.S.A. USA  
Canada CAN  
Japan JPN  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'ꢀ!  
4
ꢀ,'ꢉꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢀ,'ꢃꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢀ,'ꢁꢀꢅꢀ$%&'()*+,-  
ꢄꢀ80,'ꢀ6(7ꢌ,1)2ꢀ!  
ꢀꢀꢏꢏ2:1(5ꢏꢏ  
ꢀ&28175<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ25*$1,=$7,21ꢀꢀꢅꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ86(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢄ
ꢀꢒꢒ'(9,&(ꢀ12'(ꢒꢒ  
2
3
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to options  
[ID1:] - [ID3:].  
1
2
3
4
Go to the <UMID SET/ INFO> screen from the MAIN  
OPERATION page.  
Press the JOG dial button. The cursor moves to the ID  
entry area, allowing you to enter an ID.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[USER].  
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears.  
The characters that appear are switched in the following  
order:  
Press the JOG dial button. The cursor moves to the user  
entry area, allowing you to enter a user name.  
Space:  
†
Ð
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears.  
The characters appear in the following order:  
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
Space:  
†
Ð
', >, <, /, -  
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character.  
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
Turn the JOG dial button to move cursor to the next digit  
(clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 - 5 to set characters.  
', >, <, /, -  
<Note>  
The COUNTRY entry can only include alphabetical  
characters and spaces.  
7
8
9
When all the characters are set, turn the JOG dial button to  
move the cursor to [:].  
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character.  
Pressing the JOG dial button brings the cursor back to the  
options [ID1:] - [ID3:].  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit  
(clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 to 5 to set characters.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPX800E is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
7
8
When the last character is set, press the JOG dial button to  
bring the cursor back to the option [USER].  
<Note>  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
When the menu option CAMERA ID is set to “BAR”, the  
camera ID is recorded together with colour bar signals.  
This menu option is accessible from the <VF  
INDICATOR1> screen, which is accessible from the VF  
page.  
41  
   
4-5-7  
Mode Check Screen Displays  
(MODE CHECK button function)  
4-6  
Menu Displays in the  
Viewfinder Screen  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to check the  
settings and status of the AJ-SPX800E.  
Each press of the MODE CHECK button switches the screen as  
follows:  
4-6-1  
Menu Configuration  
USER MENU: USER MENU is factory-set. The menu can be  
configured to suit your preferences by specifying  
each option according to your purposes and  
frequency of use, through the <USER MENU  
SELECT> screen, which is accessible from the  
MAIN MENU page.  
STATUS screen ꢀ !LED screen ꢀ FUNCTION screen ꢀ  
AUDIO screen ꢀ No indication  
Each screen is displayed for about three seconds. A press of the  
MODE CHECK button switches the current screen.  
Whether or not to display each screen is specified through the  
<MODE CHECK IND> screen, which is accessible from the VF  
page.  
For more information, see [4-6-3 Selecting  
Options for USER MENU].  
To display USER MENU, press the MENU button.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ02'(ꢀ&+(&.ꢀ,1'ꢀ!  
MAIN MENU: Allows you to set all options on the settings menu.  
This menu has a category-by-category structure,  
layered according to purposes and frequency of  
use.  
ꢀ67$786ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀꢓꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ)81&7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ3ꢂ21ꢀ,1'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
To display MAIN MENU, press the MENU button  
for three seconds or longer.  
OPTION MENU  
:
Provides options which may be needed if  
functions are added in the future.  
To display OPTION MENU, hold down the LIGHT  
button and press the MENU button.  
For more information, contact your local service  
centre or distributor.  
LIGHT button  
MENU button  
JOG dial button  
42  
       
4-6-2  
Setting Menu Options  
2
3
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a desired  
menu option. Then, press the JOG dial button to display the  
sub-menu screen.  
The menu options are set with the MENU and JOG dial buttons.  
The menu comprises main menu, sub-menus and options  
menus.  
The data specified through menu options are written and saved  
in the internal memory of the AJ-SPX800E.  
This section describes how to set options in MAIN MENU. The  
other menus can be configured in the same manner (the method  
of displaying the menu screen depends on the particular menu).  
ꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀ0$,1ꢀ0(18ꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢀ9)  
ꢄ
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
<Note>  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7  
When the AJ-SPX800E is in thumbnail mode, the viewfinder  
displays “THUMBNAIL OPEN”, disabling navigation through the  
menu.  
4
1
Press the MENU button for three seconds or longer.  
The MAIN MENU screen appears, together with its options.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a desired  
menu option. Then, press the JOG dial button to display the  
options screen.  
ꢄ
ꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀ0$,1ꢀ0(18ꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢀ9)  
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
ꢄꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21ꢀ!  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀ63(('  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀ6(/(&7  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ6:  
ꢀ6:ꢀ02'(  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7  
ꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(  
ꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ*$,1  
ꢀ,5,6  
SYSTEM SETTING:  
This option is used to specify recording signal,  
recording system, etc.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the mark (ꢀ) to a desired  
option. Then, press the JOG dial button. The value starts  
blinking.  
PAINT:  
This option is used to fine-adjust images while  
monitoring the output waveform of the camera,  
using the waveform monitor. Normally, this  
adjustment requires assistance from a video  
engineer.  
This menu option may be set with an external  
remote controller, and is useful when using the  
AJ-SPX800E without a sound recordist.  
Used to select the information items to be  
displayed in the viewfinder screen.  
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0$,1ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ86(5ꢉꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ'!=220  
ꢀ86(5ꢃꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ'6ꢂ*$,1  
VF:  
CAM OPERATION:  
Used to change settings according to the  
conditions for the subject.  
MAIN OPERATION:  
Used to specify recording-related items, such as  
audio settings, time code, battery and P2 card  
remaining amounts.  
FILE:  
Used to specify file-related items such as SD card  
reading/writing and lens file settings.  
MAINTENANCE:  
Used to specify maintenance-related items.  
USER MENU SELECT:  
Used to edit USER MENU.  
43  
 
4-6-3  
Selecting Options for USER MENU  
5
Turn the JOG dial button to change the value.  
Go to the USER MENU SELECT page from MAIN MENU. Then,  
open relevant options menu screens to select options to add to  
USER MENU.  
Only the selected options are displayed as options in USER  
MENU.  
To increase the value:  
Turn the JOG dial button clockwise, as seen from the front  
of the camera.  
To decrease the value:  
Turn the JOG dial button anti-clockwise, as seen from the  
front of the camera.  
For information about how to navigate this menu, see [4-6-2  
Setting Menu Options].  
Each turn of the dial switches the value by one step. A  
quick turn changes the value rapidly; a slow turn makes a  
fine adjustment.  
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ0(18ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀ!  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢍ6(/(&7ꢀ02'(ꢎ  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ6(77,1*  
ꢀ3$,17  
ꢄ
To turn an option on or off:  
ꢀ9)  
ꢀ&$0ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ0$,1ꢀ23(5$7,21  
ꢀ),/(  
To select ON, turn the JOG dial button clockwise, as seen  
from the front of the camera.  
ꢀ0$,17(1$1&(  
To select OFF, turn the JOG dial button anti-clockwise, as  
seen from the front of the camera.  
6
7
8
Press the JOG dial button.  
The value stops blinking and is accepted.  
<Note>  
To change the settings for other options on the same page,  
repeat Steps 4 - 6.  
Options with [_] are effective. The number of options that can  
be added to USER MENU is 14 C 3 = 42 (three pages of  
options) for camera-related options, and 14 (one page of  
options) for memory-related options.  
When the settings are finalised, press the MENU button.  
This terminates the menu option setting mode and returns  
the AJ-SPX800E to normal operation mode.  
44  
 
4-7-2  
Viewfinder Status Indication Layout  
4-7  
Viewfinder Screen Status  
Displays  
The indications are arranged as illustrated below.  
In addition to video images, the viewfinder displays lamps and  
text that indicate the settings and operating status of the AJ-  
SPX800E, together with messages, a centre marker, a safety  
zone marker and the camera ID.  
ꢆ ꢈ J ꢀ  
ꢅ
ꢉ ꢌ ꢃ ꢆ ꢈ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 6 ꢀ ꢀ ' = ꢀ ꢉ ꢈ N J O ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 5 ( & ꢀ ꢉ ꢊ ꢋ 9  
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢈ .  
(;ꢃ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢊ  
ꢀ
ꢀꢀ  
ꢊ N J O ꢀ ꢀ ' , * , 7 $ / ꢉ ꢊ  
ꢀꢏ ꢏ ꢀ * $ , 1 ꢀ ꢏ ꢏ ꢀ ꢏ ꢏ ꢀ 8 6 ( 5 ꢀ 6 : ꢀ * $ , 1 ꢀ ꢏ ꢏ  
ꢀ ꢀ / 2 : ꢀ ꢅ ꢀ ꢈ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 6 ꢂ * $ , 1 ꢅ ꢁ ꢈ ꢌ ꢁ ꢋ ꢌ ꢊ ꢃ ꢌ ꢊ ꢑ  
ꢀ ꢀ 0 , ' ꢀ ꢅ ꢀ ꢔ  
4-7-1  
Lamps in the Viewfinder Screen  
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢀ ꢀ + , * + ꢅ ꢉ ꢑ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ' 6 ꢂ * $ , 1 ꢅ ꢀ ꢋ ꢀ ꢌ ꢉ ꢃ ꢀ ꢌ ꢃ ꢈ  
8 0 ꢅ 6 / 2 7 ꢀ 6 ( /  
8 ꢉ ꢅ 6 ꢂ * $ , 1 ꢀ ꢁ ꢈ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 8 ꢃ ꢅ ' 6 ꢂ * $ , 1 ꢀ ꢀ ꢋ  
4
ꢂ
E%  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 5 ( & ꢀ : $ 5 1 , 1 * ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ , '  
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 7 & * ꢀ ꢈ ꢈ ꢅ ꢈ ꢈ ꢅ ꢈ ꢈ ꢅ ꢈ ꢈ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ 3 ꢏ 5 ( &  
ꢂ
ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢋ ꢀ ꢀ ) ꢅ ꢉ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢀ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ' 9  
w
E
%
ꢂ
ꢉ ꢀ $ ꢀ ꢉ ꢑ ꢀ 9 ꢀ ) ꢅ ꢃ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢀ ꢏ ꢏ ꢏ ꢐ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢀ ꢐ ꢐ ) ꢉ ꢊ ꢀ = ꢔ ꢔ  
w
For more information, see the following pages:  
4-7-3  
Selecting Viewfinder Display  
Information  
The above viewfinder is the AJ-VF20WB (for further information on  
your optional viewfinder model, see the relevant instruction  
manual).  
To select the information items you want to have displayed in the  
viewfinder screen, go to the <VF INDICATOR1> and <VF  
INDICATOR2> screens from the VF page, and turn on or off the  
appropriate options, or specify desired values.  
For directions on setting the options, see [4-6-2 Setting Menu  
Options].  
TALLY/REC (recording) Lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated during recording, and starts  
blinking if any abnormal action occurs.  
For more information, see [7-3 Warning System].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ,1',&$725ꢉꢀ!  
ꢀ(;7(1'(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+877(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ:+,7(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ*$,1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ,5,6ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢐ,5,6  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ,'ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ%$5  
ꢀ,'ꢀ326,7,21ꢀꢀꢅ833(5ꢀ/  
ꢀ'$7(ꢌ7,0(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ=220ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$0(5$ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢅ21  
Abnormal Operating Status Warning Lamp  
This lamp comes on when the AJ-SPX800E is in any of the  
abnormal operating statuses specified through the menu  
sub-option !LED.  
For statuses that activate the lamp, see the options in the  
<!LED> screen in [8-4-7 !LED].  
BATT (battery) Lamp  
This lamp starts blinking a few minutes before the battery  
charge starts to run out, and stays illuminated after the  
battery is completely flat. The battery should be replaced  
before it is nearly flat, so that operation will not be  
interrupted.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ,1',&$725ꢃꢀ!  
ꢀ3ꢃ&$5'ꢀ5(0$,1ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77(5<ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$8',2ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ7&ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ,1)2ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ6<67(0ꢀ,1)2ꢀ&$1&(/ꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6$9(ꢀ/('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6$9(  
ꢀ'9ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ92,&(ꢀ0(02ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
For more information, see [7-3 Warning System].  
SAVE Lamp  
In the normal setting:  
The lamp stays on when the SAVE switch is positioned at  
[ON] and the output of video and audio is power-saved.  
When the menu option SAVE LED is set to “P2 CARD”:  
The lamp comes on when the P2 card remaining free space  
is getting low.  
The menu option SAVE LED can be found in the <VF  
INDICATOR2>, which is accessible from the VF page.  
50 (50-Mbps recording/playback) Lamp  
This lamp stays illuminated when the AJ-SPX800E is set to  
the DVCPRO50 (50 Mbps) format, and when playback is  
being performed in the DVCPRO50 format.  
Note that the lamp is factory-disabled. For more information,  
see the relevant section of the menu option 50M  
INDICATOR in [8-4-1 VF DISPLAY].  
45  
         
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
50i, 25P  
EX2  
Camera shooting mode (progressive or interlaced)  
Camera Shooting  
Mode  
Lens extender used.  
Extender  
LOW/MID/HIGH  
–3 to 30  
Value set for the master gain  
Example: LOW: 0  
Gain value to which S.GAIN and DS.GAIN are assigned  
MODE CHECK  
Indication Area  
(STATUS:  
S.GAIN  
30/36/42/48  
6ꢂ/12ꢂ/20ꢂ  
DS.GAIN  
Master gain,  
USER SW GAIN)  
(Cause of !LED  
illumination: displayed  
full-screen)  
GAIN (0 dB)  
GAIN (–3 dB)  
DS.GAIN  
SHUTTER  
WHITE PRE.  
EXTENDER  
BLACK STR.  
MATRIX  
Gain status  
Gain status  
DS. GAIN value  
Shutter status  
z Indications selected  
through the menu option  
!LED are marked with [ ! ].  
z Indications which may  
activate the !LED are  
marked with [ ].  
White balance status  
Extender status (EX2 or OFF)  
Black stretch status (ON or OFF)  
MATRIX status (A, B, or OFF)  
Colour correction status (ON or OFF)  
Filter status  
COLOR COR.  
FILTER  
SUPER V  
50M/25M/DV  
ATW  
SUPER V status (ON or OFF)  
Recording mode (50M, 25M, or DV)  
ATW status (ON or OFF)  
Digital zoom status (ON or OFF)  
D.ZOOM  
(FUNCTION:  
VIDEO OUT)  
SW: MEM/CAM/OFF  
SELECT: VBS/VF/Y/SDI  
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.  
Setting for menu option VIDEO OUT SEL. This option can be found in the  
<OUTPUT SEL> screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING page.  
Position of VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch  
CHAR: ON/OFF  
(FUNCTION:  
MONI OUT)  
SW: MEM/CAM/OFF  
CHAR: ON/OFF  
Position of OUTPUT SEL switch.  
The setting for menu option MONITOR OUT CHAR. This option can be found in  
the <OUTPUT SEL> screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
(FUNCTION:  
P2CARD STATUS)  
TOTAL  
Total remaining free space/capacities of the P2 cards loaded in P2 Card Slots 1 - 5  
Remaining free space/capacity of each card. The numbers denote the P2 card slot  
numbers.  
SLOT1/SLOT2/SLOT3/SLOT4/  
SLOT5  
The card status is indicated as:  
ACTIVE/ACTIVE!/ACCESSING/INFO READING/FULL/PROTECTED/  
NOT SUPPORTED/FORMAT ERROR/NO CARD  
For details of statuses, see [P2 CARD STATUS LED and status of P2 cards].  
(AUDIO: Enabling or  
disabling the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control)  
CH1: ON/OFF  
CH2: ON/OFF  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 1, then ON is  
indicated. If not, OFF is indicated.  
If the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is in effect for Channel 2, then ON is  
indicated. If not, OFF is indicated.  
(AUDIO: Power status  
for the microphone)  
FRONT: ON/OFF  
REAR: ON/OFF  
Power status of the front microphone  
Power status of the rear microphone  
For more information, see [8-6-5 MIC/AUDIO2].  
(AUDIO: Input signal  
and level for each  
channel)  
FRNT/W.L./REAR/1394/OFF  
CH1/2/3/4  
Input signal and level for each channel  
46  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
AWB A ACTIVE  
AWB being performed on Ch A.  
AWB being performed on Ch B.  
AWB successful on Ch A.  
AWB successful on Ch B.  
AWB action aborted by user.  
AWB action failed. The second line indicates the status.  
Colour temperature too low.  
Camera Warning and  
Report Area  
(related to AWB, ABB  
AWB B ACTIVE  
AWB A OK _._K  
AWB B OK _._K  
AWB BREAK _._K  
AWB NG  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
LEVEL OVER  
LOW LIGHT  
and switch settings)  
Colour temperature too high.  
Brightness too high.  
Brightness too low.  
TIME OVER  
AWB PRESET _._K  
ATW MODE  
CHECK FILTER  
AWB A VARꢄ_._K  
AWB B VAR _._K  
ABB ACTIVE  
Action timed-out.  
AWB cannot proceed because the AWB switch is positioned at [PRE].  
AWB cannot proceed during ATW.  
Make sure the FILTER control is positioned correctly.  
AWB cannot proceed because [A] is set to “VAR”.  
AWB cannot proceed because [B] is set to “VAR”.  
ABB being performed.  
4
ABB OK  
ABB BREAK  
ABB action successful.  
ABB action aborted by user.  
ABB NG  
W-SHD ACTIVE  
W-SHD OK  
W-SHD BREAK  
W-SHD NG  
ABB action failed.  
White shading being adjusted.  
White shading has been adjusted.  
White shading action aborted by user.  
White shading adjustment failed due to excessive brightness.  
LVL OVER  
B-SHD READY  
B-SHD ACTIVE  
B-SHD OK  
Black shading accepted (by holding down the ABB switch during ABB adjustment).  
Black shading being adjusted.  
Black shading adjustment successful.  
B-SHD BREAK  
B-SHD NG  
Black shading adjustment aborted by user.  
Black shading adjustment failed.  
(Switch changeover  
indication)  
WHITE: # _._K  
The WHITE BAL switch has been switched. # is replaced with A, B or PRE. When  
[A] and [B] are set to “VAR”, then it is indicated as VAR _._ K. When [B] is  
assigned ATW, then it is indicated as ATW MODE.  
AUTO KNEE: ON/OFF  
GAIN:__dB  
SS: 1/____  
SS: ꢅ 1/____  
SS: SUPER V  
AUTO KNEE switch has been switched to ON or OFF.  
Gain has been switched with the GAIN selector switch or a user button.  
When the shutter speed has been switched, the shutter speed is indicated.  
Shutter speed is in SYNCRO SCAN mode.  
Shutter speed is in SUPER V mode.  
FILTER: _ _._K  
EXTENDER: ON/OFF  
IRIS: __ F _._  
Filter position and detail have been switched.  
Lens extender has been turned on or off.  
Indicated when the iris override correction value is to be changed.  
(Low light warning)  
(Y GET value)  
LOW LIGHT  
Brightness too low.  
___._%  
When the Y GET function is being carried out (the output brightness level near the  
centre marker is being measured for about three seconds: the level is represented  
as a percentage), the output brightness level near the centre marker is indicated as  
a percentage.  
(MARKER indication)  
MKR: A/B/OFF  
Current marker type  
INH  
User buttons disabled.  
Selected S.GAIN  
Selected DS.GAIN  
Whether S.IRIS is ON or OFF.  
Iris override can be set (the IRIS OVERRIDE setting is ON).  
Status of SUPER BLACK (ON or OFF). When it is ON, the set value is also  
indicated.  
User button  
functions  
UM: USER MAIN  
button  
U1: USER1 button  
U2: USER2 button  
S.GAIN __dB/OFF  
DS.GAIN __ꢂ/OFF  
S.IRIS ON/OFF  
I.OVR ON/OFF  
S.BLK –__/OFF  
B.STR ON/OFF  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
Status of BLACK STRETCH (shade correction for the black level): ON or OFF  
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 1 has been switched.  
Input signal to be recorded on Audio Channel 2 has been switched.  
USER button acts as REC switch (only in MODE CHECK mode).  
Y GET function ON.  
Y GET ON  
RET SW  
USER button acts as RET switch (only in MODE CHECK).  
ATW being performed.  
Status of the digital zoom (ON or OFF)  
Status of News Gamma (ON or OFF)  
Switch that changes the target card is set.  
ATW ON/OFF  
D.ZOOM ON/OFF  
NEWS-G ON/OFF  
SLOT SEL  
1 - 4  
-
Position of the CC/ND filter.  
Filter not positioned correctly.  
Filter position  
A
B
P
T
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [A].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [B].  
WHITE BAL switch positioned at [PRE].  
ATW mode active. When brightness and colour are outside operating limits, the  
indication blinks.  
WHITE BAL switch  
position  
6ꢂ/12ꢂ/20ꢂ  
Storage gain (DS.GAIN) value (when active)  
Stored gain  
indication  
__dB  
Current gain value.  
Gain value  
47  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
SYSTEM ERROR-__  
Something abnormal is happening to the internal computer communications or  
reference signal. No further recording or playback can be performed. __ꢄis  
replaced with an error code.For more information, see [7-3-2 Error Codes].  
P2 card has been removed while being accessed (recorded, played back, or  
formatted), and subsequent operation is disabled.  
Something abnormal is happening to video and/or audio being recorded. This  
indication stays on until the next recording starts.  
System information  
and warnings  
TURN POWER OFF  
REC WARNING  
BACKUP BATT EMPTY  
WIRELESS-RF  
EOM  
Backup battery needs replacing.  
RF signal from the wireless receiver is degraded.  
P2 card has no free space.  
Playback position is at the start of all the clips.  
BOS  
EOS  
CANNOT REC  
Playback position is at the end of all the clips.  
The P2 card is not recordable. Detailed information is provided on the FUNCTION  
screen of MODE CHECK . See the relevant section of the MODE CHECK area.  
Clip cannot be played back perhaps because no P2 card is loaded, or the P2 card  
contains no clips.  
CANNOT PLAY  
VOICE CANNOT REC  
Voice memos cannot be recorded, possibly perhaps because the P2 card has no  
free space, or 100 voice memos are already recorded on one clip.  
Voice memo being recorded.  
VOICE REC  
VOICE OFF  
Recording of voice memo stopped.  
VOICE PLAY  
MARK ON/OFF  
Voice memo being played back.  
Shot mark been added or deleted. For information on shot marks, see [3-9 Shot  
Mark Function].  
UPDATING  
USB DRIVE  
Clip information is being updated. Playback operation disabled.  
AJ-SPX800E is in USB mode. When communication is disabled, the indication  
blinks. (To be supported in the near future.)  
THUMBNAIL OPEN  
Thumbnail is being manipulated.  
Voice memo being recorded. When the free space for voice memos is less than  
one minute, the indication blinks.  
V
Voice memo  
indication  
- - - - „- - - - +  
F
W
R
Selected channel together with its audio level.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at FRONT.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at WIRELESS.  
AUDIO IN switch is positioned at REAR.  
Audio input channel  
and level meter  
TCG  
TCR  
(V)UBG  
(V)UBR  
12:59:59:20  
12:59:59:20  
AB CD EF 00  
12 34 56 78  
TCG (time code generator value)  
TCR (time code reader value)  
UBG VUBG  
Time code indication  
UBR VUBR.  
DV  
DV format specified and playback being performed in the DV format.  
DV format indication  
+ +  
+
Correction phase of the iris override (when active)  
Iris override  
indication  
+ +  
– –  
: On the open side by 1  
: On the closed side by 1  
+: On the open side by 0.5  
–: On the closed side by 0.5  
(No indication)  
–
No indication : Standard status  
– –  
NC  
0PEN  
F1.7 - F16  
CLOSE  
Lens cable is not connected.  
Lens iris is at maximum.  
Lens iris value  
Iris, F value  
Lens iris closed.  
<Note>  
These indications are provided when the lens is capable of indicating the iris value.  
When the iris is being overridden, they blink.  
Z00 - Z99  
Zoom degree is indicated. This indication is not provided for a lens that does not  
return the zoom position, even if the indication is set to ON.  
Zoom indication  
P-REC (blink)  
Indicated while pre-recorded video and audio are being recorded on the P2 card.  
PRE RECORDING  
indication  
ID  
The ID is set to be superimposed on the video from the camera.  
ID record indication  
Battery type  
PRO14 - AC_ADPT  
Battery type, selected through a menu option. When the AC adapter is connected,  
it is indicated as AC_ADPT.  
__._V  
___%  
EMP  
Battery remaining level in tenths of a volt  
Digital battery remaining level, as a percentage  
Digital battery empty.  
Battery remaining  
level/voltage  
MAX  
Digital battery fully charged.  
REC  
Recording status of the camera-recorder represented as characters when 1394 is  
connected. The indication stays illuminated during recording, or blinks when a  
warning is given.  
Camera-recorder  
REC indication  
48  
Information Item  
Indication  
Status  
___min  
The indication “___min” stays illuminated under normal conditions or blinks when  
the remaining level is near zero.  
When the card space is used up, “END” comes on.  
The P2 card is write-protected.  
P2 card remaining  
free space  
END  
WP  
LOOP  
The camera-recorder is in LOOP REC mode. When loop recording cannot be  
performed, for example because the P2 card has no free space, the indication  
blinks.  
INFO P2  
_/_  
P2 card being recognised.  
Total free space/capacities of the P2 cards (when MODE CHECK is being  
performed).  
<Note>  
When the menu option P2 CARD REMAIN is set to “ONE CARD”, the number of  
the P2 card slot that contains the target card is indicated, together with the  
remaining space.  
For more information, see [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication] on  
the next page.  
4
ꢀ___min  
The number of the P2 card slot that contains the target card and the remaining free  
space (when MODE CHECK is being performed) are indicated. In LOOP REC  
mode, the minimum guaranteed recording time is indicated. This indication also  
appears when the target P2 card has been switched with a user button.  
The minimum guaranteed recording time refers to the sum, at the time loop  
recording is stopped, of the remaining free space of available P2 cards, except for  
the card with the largest remaining free space.  
P2 card remaining  
free space (when  
MODE CHECK is  
being performed)  
Example: If three P2 cards are available, with remaining space of eight minutes,  
five minutes and two minutes respectively, then the minimum  
guaranteed recording time is seven minutes.  
DZ  
Camera-recorder in digital zoom mode. Note that the indication blinks while the  
camera-recorder is in FOCUS mode.  
D.ZOOM  
S
B
SB  
Super iris ON.  
Super black ON.  
Super iris and super black both ON.  
Super iris ON/super  
black ON  
_._ꢄK  
Colour temperature assigned to A, B, and PRE of the WHITE BAL switch (this is a  
value stored at AWB performance or a value set through the menu option). The  
indication is not provided in ATW mode.  
Colour temperature  
ꢅ1/__._  
1/60 - 1/2000  
SUPER V  
Shutter speed set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
Shutter speed fixed.  
Shutter speed set to SUPER V (high vertical resolution mode).  
Shutter speed/mode  
49  
P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity Indication  
Status of  
AJ-SPX800E  
Menu option  
P2 CARD REMAIN*  
P2 card remaining free space  
indication  
P2 card remaining free space  
indication (during MODE CHECK)  
Recording status  
Under normal  
conditions  
Other than LOOP TOTAL  
REC mode  
The total remaining free space of all P2 Not provided  
cards loaded in the P2 card slots is  
indicated in minutes.  
Example: 30min  
ONE CARD  
The number of the P2 card slot holding Not provided  
the target P2 card, together with that  
card’s remaining free space indicated in  
minutes.  
Example: ꢀ8min  
OFF  
LOOP REC mode TOTAL/ONE CARD  
OFF  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Indicated as [LOOP]  
Not provided  
Not provided  
Not provided  
During MODE  
CHECK  
Other than LOOP TOTAL/ONE CARD/  
The total remaining free space and  
capacities of all P2 cards loaded in the the target P2 card, together with that  
P2 card slots are indicated in minutes.  
Example: 20/40  
The number of the P2 card slot holding  
REC mode  
OFF  
card’s remaining free space, indicated in  
minutes.  
Example: ꢀ8min  
LOOP REC mode  
Indicated as [LOOP]  
The minimum guaranteed recording time  
is indicated in minutes.  
Example: 7min  
*The menu option P2CARD REMAIN can be found in the <VF INDICATOR2> screen, which is accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Indications Available in the Viewfinder Screen  
Selectable  
Provided when the  
appropriate status  
is encountered.  
between on and  
off through menu  
options  
Provided during  
MODE CHECK*  
Provided during  
playback  
Selectable  
1
Camera shooting mode  
Extender  
n
n
–
–
n
–
z
z
n
n
n
z
z
z
z
z
z
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
–
–
MODE CHECK indication area  
Camera warning and report area  
User button functions  
Filter position  
–
–
n
n
–
–
–
–
n
n
n
n
n
n
–
WHITE BAL switch position  
Stored gain indication  
Gain value  
–
–
–
–
–
–
System information and warnings  
Voice memo indication  
n
n
n
n
All 4ch input  
information  
Audio input channel and level meter  
n
–
n
–
Time code indication  
DV format indication  
Iris override indication  
Iris, F value  
n
n
n
n
n
–
–
n
n
–
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
n
n
n
n
n
–
n
n
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Zoom indication  
–
Pre-recording indication  
ID record indication  
n
n
–
–
–
Battery type  
–
n
n
n
n
Battery remaining level/voltage  
Camera-recorder REC indication  
P2 card remaining free space  
n
n
n
–
n
–
P2 card remaining free space  
(MODE CHECK)  
–
–
z
n
–
D.ZOOM  
–
n
n
n
n
z
z
z
z
n
n
n
n
–
–
–
–
Super iris ON/super black ON  
Colour temperature  
Shutter speed/mode  
n
n
n
*1 n: Not provided when the menu option STATUS is set to OFF, which can be found in the <MODE CHK IND> screen, accessible from the : VF  
page.  
z: Provided regardless of the menu option setting.  
50  
   
4-7-4  
Display Modes and Setting  
Changes/adjustment Result  
Messages  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ',63/$<ꢀ!  
ꢀ',63ꢀ&21',7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ',63ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ9)ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ<  
ꢀ9)ꢀ'7/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢉꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢕꢈꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢑꢆꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6327  
ꢀ/2:ꢀ/,*+7ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢆꢇ  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ0(18ꢀ',63ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢆꢈ0ꢀ,1',&$725ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0$5.(5ꢌ&+$5ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈꢇ  
The messages that appear on the viewfinder screen to indicate  
changes to settings and adjustment results may be limited, or  
set not to appear, through the menu option DISP MODE. This  
menu option can be found in the <VF DISPLAY> screen, which  
is accessible from the VF page.  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [4-6-2 Setting Menu  
Options].  
Settings Change/adjustment Result Messages and DISP MODE Settings  
4
DISP MODE  
settings  
Message appears when:  
Message  
1
2
3
CC/ND filter changed.  
FILTER: n (n=1, 2, 3, 4)  
GAIN: n dB  
C
C
n
Gain changed.  
C
C
C
C
C
n
n
n
n
(n=–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30)  
WHITE BAL switch re-positioned.  
WHITE: n (n=A, B, PRE)  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch positioned at [AUTO AUTO KNEE: ON (or OFF)  
KNEE] or [OFF].  
SS:  
1/60 (or 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
ꢅ1/__._)  
Shutter speed/mode changed.  
C
n
n
White balance adjusted (AWB performed).  
Black balance adjusted (ABB performed).  
Extender selected.  
Example: AWB A OK 3.2 K  
Example: ABB OK  
C
C
C
C
C
C
n
n
C
n
C
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Example: EXTENDER ON  
Example: UM: S.GAIN 30 dB  
Example: MKR: A  
USER button selected.  
MARKER SELECT button selected.  
Iris being overridden.  
Example: ++ F 5.6  
n: Message appears.  
C: Message does not appear.  
51  
   
4-7-5  
Setting the Marker Displays  
Markers  
The centre, safety zone, safety zone area and frame markers  
may be set to ON or OFF, along with specifications of the marker  
types. To set and select markers, go to the <VF MARKER>  
screen from the VF page and select the appropriate options.  
For directions on navigating the menu, see [4-6-2 Setting Menu  
Options].  
Centre marker  
Safety zone  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ0$5.(5ꢀ!  
ޓ
ޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓޓ
0.5ꢅ$  
ꢀ7$%/(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ$  
ꢀ&(17(5ꢀ0$5.ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀ6$)(7<ꢀ=21(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ  
ꢀ6$)(7<ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢔꢈꢇ  
ꢀ)5$0(ꢀ6,*ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢊꢅꢁ  
ꢀ)5$0(ꢀ0$5.ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)/$0(ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉꢆ  
The view angle specified through the menu  
option FRAME SIG is displayed.  
<Note>  
The indication MKR:A at the upper right of the screen shows the  
current indication status. To view TABLE B, press the MARKER  
SELECT button. This changes the indication to MKR:B, allowing  
you to view the settings.  
4-7-7  
Checking Return Video Signal in the  
Viewfinder  
The viewfinder displays the return video signal input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector while the RET button at the lens is held  
down.  
To enable this capability, select CAM RET for the menu option  
RET SW. This option can be found in the <SW MODE> screen,  
which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
4-7-6  
Marker Check Screen Displays  
(MARKER SELECT button function)  
The viewfinder can display a screen that allows you to view the  
marker settings of the AJ-SPX800E.  
ꢄꢀ6:ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
Pressing the MARKER SELECT button on the camera-recorder  
switches the marker indication as follows.  
ꢄ
ꢀ5(7ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ5(&ꢀ&+(&.  
ꢀ6ꢂ%/.ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢏꢉꢈ  
ꢀ$872ꢀ.1((ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
Marker A ꢀ Marker B ꢀ No marker  
ꢀ6+'ꢖ$%%ꢀ6:ꢀ&7/ꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ%$56ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6037(  
ꢀ6ꢂ*$,1ꢀ2))ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ/ꢌ0ꢌ+  
ꢀ'6ꢂ*$,1ꢀ2))ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ'6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ'ꢂ=220ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ=220  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ'$7$ꢀ6$9(ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+.ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢅ5ꢂ5(9,(:  
If the menu option FRAME SIG is set to 16:9 as the information  
of Marker A and 4:3 as the information of Marker B, then the  
16:9 and 4:3 view angles can easily be checked with the button,  
as required.  
MARKER SELECT button  
52  
       
4-8  
Adjusting and setting the LCD  
monitor  
5
Through the menu option LCD MON CHAR, specify  
whether or not the LCD should display the same characters  
as the viewfinder.  
This menu option can be found in the <OUTPUT SEL>  
screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM SETTING  
page.  
Using the LCD Monitor  
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch of the AJ-SPX800E.  
Slide the OPEN button in the arrow ꢀ direction to open the  
LCD monitor.  
ꢄ287387ꢀ6(/!  
ꢀ9,'(2ꢀ287ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢅ9%6  
ꢀ287387ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(18ꢀ21/<  
ꢀ021,725ꢀ287ꢀ&+$5ꢅ2))  
ꢄ
ꢀ/&'ꢀ021ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ9)ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ((ꢌ3%  
ꢀ7+80%1$,/ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
4
<Notes>  
z When closing the LCD monitor make sure that it is shut  
tight.  
z In an environment with sudden temperature changes,  
condensation may form on the liquid crystal surface of  
the monitor. If this happens, wipe off the moisture with a  
soft, dry cloth.  
z When the camera-recorder is very cold, the video image  
in the LCD monitor will appear slightly darker immediately  
after the power is turned on. Once the interior of the  
camera-recorder warms up, the LCD monitor delivers  
normal brightness.  
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for most convenient  
viewing.  
The monitor can turn up to 180 degrees towards the lens  
and up to 90 degrees towards you.  
<Note>  
Self-portrait Shooting  
To prevent camera-recorder failure, do not allow undue  
force to be applied to the monitor (when it is open).  
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180 degrees  
towards the lens, you can set the menu option SELF SHOOT to  
“MIRROR”, to horizontally flip the video image on the LCD  
display, and allow you to view a mirror image while shooting.  
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor is  
horizontally flipped, not the actual video being recorded.  
The menu option SELF SHOOT can be found in the <LCD  
MONITOR> screen, which is accessible from the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
<Note>  
When the LCD monitor is angled 180 degrees towards you with  
the menu option SELF SHOOT to “MIRROR”, the LCD monitor  
does not provide the same status indication as the viewfinder,  
regardless of the setting for the menu option LCD MON CHAR.  
4
The options BRIGHTNESS, COLOR LEVEL, and  
CONTRAST show respectively the brightness, colour level  
and contrast of the screen. These options can be found in  
the <LCD MONITOR> screen, which is accessible from the  
SYSTEM SETTING page.  
ꢄ
ꢄ/&'ꢀ021,725!  
ꢀ%5,*+71(66ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢈ  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ/(9(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢈ  
ꢀ&2175$67ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢐꢈ  
ꢀ%$&./,*+7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ6(/)ꢀ6+227ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0,5525  
53  
 
4-9-2  
Selecting Video Output Signals  
4-9  
Menu-driven Function Setup  
You need to select the signals to be output from the VIDEO OUT  
and MON OUT connectors.  
Each function is set up using the menu system.  
4-9-1  
Setting the Switchover of USER SW  
GAIN  
When the extension board AJ-YA902AG (optional accessory) is  
attached, an SDI signal can be output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
In addition to the standard L/M/H gain mode, the AJ-SPX800E  
supports S.GAIN (super gain) mode, featuring greater than 30-  
dB analog gain-up, together with DS.GAIN (digital super gain)  
mode, storage-type gain-up based on progressive drive  
technology.  
To make use of this feature, you need to specify desired gains  
through the menu options S.GAIN and DS.GAIN.  
For example, if the S.GAIN and DS.GAIN features are assigned  
to either the USER MAIN, USER1 or USER2 buttons, three  
different gain-up modes are available through button-mode  
combinations.  
For more information, see [8-2-4 OUTPUT SEL].  
ꢄ
ꢄ287387ꢀ6(/!  
ꢀ9,'(2ꢀ287ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢅ9%6  
ꢀ287387ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(18ꢀ21/<  
ꢀ021,725ꢀ287ꢀ&+$5ꢅ2))  
ꢀ/&'ꢀ021ꢀ&+$5ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ9)ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ((ꢌ3%  
ꢀ7+80%1$,/ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
The menu options can be found in the <USER SW GAIN>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
1) To increase the gain without increasing noise:  
Combine the L/M/H gain and DS.GAIN features.  
2) To increase the normal analog gain:  
(noise is increased)  
4-9-3  
Selecting Function for the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL Control  
Use the S.GAIN feature alone.  
3) To achieve ultra-high sensitivity:  
The FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control can be assigned the function  
of adjusting the recording level.  
Combine the S.GAIN and DS.GAIN features.(Gain  
increased by up to 68 dB.)  
To specify whether or not the FRONT AUDIO LEVEL control is  
effective on the channels set to accept input signals, use the  
menu options FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2. These  
options can be found in the <MIC/AUDIO1> screen, which is  
accessible from the MAIN OPERATION page.  
However, you should be extra careful when using this  
combination. With moving subjects, the greater the increase  
in DS.GAIN the more annoying the after-images will be.  
In this case, limit the increase to +12dBꢂ (1/12).  
Note that the DS.GAIN feature is disabled when the AJ-  
SPX800E is in progressive mode.  
For more information, see [8-6-4 MIC/AUDIO1].  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ0,&ꢌ$8',2ꢉꢀ!  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ)5217ꢀ95ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0,&ꢀ/2:&87ꢀ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢉꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ/,0,7(5ꢀ&+ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ$872ꢀ/(9(/ꢀ&+ꢁꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ$872ꢀ/(9(/ꢀ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢁꢌ&+ꢊꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6:  
ꢀꢃꢆ0ꢀ5(&ꢀ&+ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃ&+  
ꢀ7(67ꢀ721(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ*$,1ꢀ!  
ꢀ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ
_
ꢁꢈE%  
ꢀ
_
ꢁꢋE%  
ꢀ
_
ꢊꢃE%  
ꢀ
_
ꢊꢑE%  
ꢀ'6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ
_
ꢀꢋE%ꢂꢍꢉꢌꢃꢆꢎ  
ꢀ
_
ꢉꢃE%ꢂꢍꢉꢌꢉꢃꢎ  
ꢃꢈE%ꢂꢍꢉꢌꢆꢎ  
ꢀ_  
Settings Options and Usage  
S.GAIN:  
Analog gain-ups with _ marks enabled.  
Analog gain-ups without _ marks disabled.  
Storage-type gain-ups with _ marks enabled.  
Storage-type gain-ups without _ marks disabled.  
DS.GAIN:  
54  
         
NEWS-G:  
Function of switching on and off News Gamma  
assigned.  
<Note>  
4-9-4  
Assigning Functions to USER MAIN,  
USER1 and USER2 Buttons  
News Gamma is capable of reproducing shades  
without whiteout or blackout. This is useful for  
such operations as news shooting.  
To turn on/off News Gamma using the USER  
button which is assigned NEWS-G, the menu  
option GAMMA MODE SEL must be set to “STD”.  
This option can be found in the <GAMMA>  
screen, which is accessible from the PAINT page.  
The USER MAIN, USER1, and USER2 buttons can be assigned  
user-selected functions.  
To select desired functions, use the menu options USER MAIN  
SW, USER1 SW and USER2 SW. These options can be found in  
the <USER SW> screen, which is accessible from the CAM  
OPERATION page.  
ꢄꢀ86(5ꢀ6:ꢀ!  
AUDIO CH1: Function of switching the input signal source for  
Audio Channel 1 assigned.  
ꢄ
ꢀ86(5ꢀ0$,1ꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6/27ꢀ6(/  
ꢀ86(5ꢉꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6ꢂ*$,1  
ꢀ86(5ꢃꢀ6:ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ'6ꢂ*$,1  
Pressing the button switches the input signal in  
the following order: FRONT ꢀ W.L. ꢀ REAR.  
Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used  
to change the input signal: later specification  
takes precedence.  
4
AUDIO CH2: Function of switching the input signal source for  
Audio Channel 2 assigned.  
Pressing the button switches the input signal in  
the following order: FRONT ꢀ W.L. ꢀ REAR.  
Note that the AUDIO IN switch can also be used  
to change the input signal: later specification  
takes precedence.  
Function of the REC START/STOP button  
assigned.  
Function of the RET button at the lens assigned.  
Selectable Functions  
INH:  
No function assigned.  
S.GAIN:  
DS.GAIN:  
S.IRIS:  
S.GAIN function assigned.  
DS.GAIN function assigned.  
Super Iris function assigned.  
REC SW:  
RET SW:  
This is useful for backlight compensation.  
Iris Override function assigned.  
SLOT SEL: Function of switching the target P2 card among  
I.OVR:  
multiple cards assigned.  
The target (reference) value in Auto Iris mode  
must be changed.  
To change the target value, put the AJ-SPX800E  
into this mode and press the JOG dial button. Turn  
the JOG dial button clockwise or anti-clockwise to  
change the value. The iris indication section of the  
viewfinder screen displays “+”, “+ +”, “–”, or “– –”.  
When the desired value is displayed, stop turning  
the JOG dial button. Then, press the dial button to  
accept that value.  
4-9-5  
Setting Colour Temperature  
Manually  
The white balance can be manually adjusted by setting the  
colour temperature. Manual colour temperature settings can be  
performed for each of the WHITE BAL switch positions: PRST, A  
and B.  
To enable manual colour temperature setting, the menu options  
AWB A and AWB B must be set to VAR.  
The colour temperature is set using the menu options COLOR  
TEMP PRE, COLOR TEMP A, and COLOR TEMP B.  
These options can be found in the <WHITE BALANCE MODE>  
screen, which is accessible from the CAM OPERATION page.  
Note that once the mode is cancelled or the power  
is turned off the original reference value will be  
used again.  
+:  
+ +:  
–:  
Iris opens up by 0.5.  
Iris opens up by 1.  
Iris closes down by 0.5.  
Iris closes down by 1.  
– –:  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ%$/$1&(ꢀ02'(ꢀ!  
No indication: The reference value is used.  
Super Black function assigned.  
This function lowers the black level to the pedestal  
level or below.  
S.BLK:  
ꢀ),/7(5ꢀ,1+ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ6+2&./(66ꢀ$:%ꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$5($ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢃꢆꢇ  
ꢀ$:% $%%ꢀ2))6(7ꢀꢀꢅ2))  
B.STR:  
Black Stretch function assigned.  
This function emphasises the black shades.  
Doubles the view angle, both horizontally and  
vertically.  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ35(ꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ$ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$:%ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ0(0  
ꢀ&2/25ꢀ7(03ꢀ%ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢃꢈꢈ.  
ꢀ$7:ꢀ63(('ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
D.ZOOM:  
<Note>  
When the camera is set to the 50i operation  
mode, this function forcibly switches the operation  
mode to 25P.  
ATW:  
Y GET:  
Auto-tracking white balance function assigned.  
Function of indicating the brightness level of the  
centre marker assigned.  
55  
       
4-10-2 Formatting, Writing and Reading an  
SD Card  
4-10 Handling data  
Setting Data Using an SD Card  
To format an SD card, write settings data or read data on an SD  
card, navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/ WRITE>  
screen from the FILE page.  
An SD card (optional accessory) can be used as a setup card  
that stores up to eight files of settings menu specifications.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum state.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
4-10-1 Handling SD Cards  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
An SD card may be inserted or removed, either before or after  
the power is turned on.  
To insert an SD card:  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and insert an SD card (optional  
accessory) into the SD card slot with the notch upward. Close  
the lid.  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
For an SD card formatted with a device that does not support SD  
standards, the message “FORMAT ERROR” appears at the  
upper right of the screen. In this case, reformat the card as  
follows. Note that the indication “FORMAT ERROR” does not  
disappear if the SD card is replaced with this menu page open.  
When the SD card is replaced, perform TITLE READ.  
To format an SD card:  
<Note>  
SD cards may be formatted via the thumbnail screen. For more  
information, see [6-11 Formatting SD Cards].  
1
2
3
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu  
option CARD CONFIG.  
<Note>  
An SD card must be inserted with the right side facing the slot. If  
the card is hard to insert, it may be reversed or upside down. Do  
not force it into the slot. Check the card before re-inserting it.  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
To remove the SD card:  
Open the lid of the switch cover, and ensure that the BUSY lamp  
is not illuminated. Then, further depress the SD card towards the  
main unit. This releases the SD card from the insertion slot. Take  
hold of the SD card and remove it. Close the lid.  
ꢀ&21),*"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
SD cards must not be used or stored in an  
environment where they may be:  
ꢄ
z Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;  
z Exposed to water droplets; or  
z Electrically charged.  
For storage, the SD card must be kept inserted into the AJ-  
SPX800E with the lid closed.  
56  
     
To write set data on an SD card:  
4
To format the SD card, turn the JOG dial button to move the  
cursor to YES. Then, press the dial button.  
When the SD card has been formatted, the following  
message appears:  
1
Navigate the menu to the <SD CARD READ/WRITE>  
screen.  
To select a file number:  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[W. SELECT]. Then, press the dial button.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&21),*ꢀ2.  
ꢄ
4
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
The card will not be formatted if the following message appears  
when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
Error message  
CONFIG NG  
NO CARD  
(No SD card inserted.)  
Remedy  
Insert an SD card.  
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number (1 - 8).  
Then, press the dial button.  
CONFIG NG  
ERROR  
The card may be defective.  
Replace the card.  
(SD card cannot be formatted.)  
To give the selected file a title:  
CONFIG NG  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD card is write-protected.)  
Remove the card and cancel the  
protect.  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[TITLE:].  
CONFIG NG  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD card not accessible).  
Example: The SD card is not  
accessible because it is being  
played back.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
After the operation in process,  
format the card.  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
5
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPX800E is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
<Note>  
If an SD card is inserted or removed with the <SD CARD  
READ/WRITE> screen open, the data title cannot be  
edited.  
5
Press the JOG dial button. This moves the cursor to the  
entry area, putting the AJ-SPX800E in entry mode.  
Move the cursor to the option TITLE READ and press the  
JOG dial button.  
Edit the data title.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
57  
6
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears.  
The characters that appear are switched in the following  
order:  
The data will not be written if any of the following messages  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
Error message  
WRITE NG  
NO CARD  
(No SD card inserted.)  
Remedy  
Insert an SD card.  
Space:  
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
WRITE NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(SD card not properly formatted.) Replace the card.  
The card has not been formatted  
using the AJ-SPX800E.  
Numerals:  
Ð
Symbols:  
0 to 9  
', >, <, /, -  
WRITE NG  
The card may be defective.  
ERROR  
(SD card not writable.)  
Replace the card.  
7
8
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character.  
WRITE NG  
WRITE PROTECT  
(SD card write-protected.)  
Remove the card and disable the  
protect.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit  
(clockwise), and repeat Steps 6 - 7 to set characters (up to  
eight characters).  
WRITE NG  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD card not accessible).  
Example: The SD card is not  
accessible because it is being  
played back.  
After the operation in process,  
format the card.  
To write data on a selected file:  
WRITENG  
CARD FULL  
(SD card has no free space.)  
The card is not writable because it  
has no free space. Delete  
unwanted files or replace the card  
with a new one.  
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button to move the  
cursor to [:].  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
13  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
When the data has been written, the following message  
appears:  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢁ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
10  
11  
12  
Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option  
[TITLE:].  
:5,7(ꢀ2.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[WRITE].  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
14  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu disappears and the status of the AJ-  
SPX800E is indicated at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder screen.  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7,7/(ꢅ  
58  
To read data on an SD card:  
6
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
When the data has been written, the following message  
appears:  
1
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[SD CARD READ/WRITE]. Then, press the dial button.  
To select a file number:  
2
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the menu  
option [R. SELECT]. Then, press the dial button.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ2.  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
4
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
The data will not be read if any of the following messages  
appears when the JOG dial button is pressed:  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
Error message  
READ NG  
NO CARD  
(No SD card inserted.)  
Remedy  
Insert an SD card.  
3
Turn the JOG dial button to select a desired number (1 - 8).  
Then, press the dial button.  
READ NG  
FORMAT ERROR  
(SD card not properly formatted.) Replace the card.  
The card has not been formatted  
using the AJ-SPX800E.  
To read data on a selected file:  
READ NG  
NO FILE  
(No file found.)  
Write file data.  
4
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[READ].  
READ NG  
ERROR  
(SD card not readable.)  
Only data written with the AJ-  
SPX800E is readable.  
ꢄꢀ6'ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5($'ꢌ:5,7(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ:ꢂ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ&21),*  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀ5($'  
READ NG  
CANNOT ACCCESS  
(SD card not accessible).  
Example: The SD card is not  
accessible because it is being  
played back.  
After the operation in process,  
read data.  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢆꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢋꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢕꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢀꢀꢑꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
7
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
The settings menu will be replaced by status indications for  
the AJ-SPX800E.  
5
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
59  
4-10-3 How to Use the User Data  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
This writes the settings data into the user area of the  
internal memory of the AJ-SPX800E.  
It is possible to transfer settings and other data to the user area  
of the internal memory of the AJ-SPX800E.  
This data allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup  
state.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To write data, go to the <INITIALIZE> screen from the FILE  
page. To read the written user data, go to the <SCENE> screen  
from the FILE page.  
To read written user data:  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
READ USER DATA.  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
3
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
4
5
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
The data written in the user area of the internal memory of  
the AJ-SPX800E is read to complete the setting.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To write settings data in the user area:  
The set user data may be also read without navigating the menu.  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <INITIALIZE> screen.  
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
WRITE USER DATA.  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at [PRST].  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
3
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
WHITE BAL  
Switch  
3
With the AUTO W/B BAL switch flipped up, turn on the  
POWER switch.  
This resets all settings for USER menu options to their  
defaults.  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
60  
 
4-10-4 How to Use Scene File Data  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
This writes the setting data into the scene file area of the  
AJ-SPX800E internal memory.  
It is possible to write the settings data into the scene file area of  
the internal memory of the AJ-SPX800E, or to read data written  
in this area. Four types of scene files are available. This data  
allows you to quickly reproduce an optimum setup state.  
TITLEs 1 - 3 are factory-assigned the defaults for the AJ-  
SPX800E; TITLE 4 is assigned the parameter for FILMLIKE.  
The setting for TITLE 4 can be changed.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To change the settings, go to the <SCENE> screen from the  
FILE page.  
To write settings data for scene files:  
4
1
2
Navigate the menu to the SCENE screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the SCENE  
SEL option.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option  
WRITE.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7,7/(ꢅ  
61  
 
To read settings data for scene files:  
To return data for scene files to their defaults:  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
SCENE SEL.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
SCENE SEL.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select a desired scene file  
number.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to blink scene file numbers.  
Then, turn the dial button to select the scene file that you  
want to reset.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
4
5
Press the JOG dial button to accept the scene file.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the READ  
option.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[RESET].  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
6
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀ5(6(7"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the AJ-SPX800E is read to complete the  
setting.  
7
8
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
The data stored in the scene file area of the internal  
memory of the AJ-SPX800E is reset to the defaults.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
62  
To title settings data for scene files:  
10  
Press the JOG dial button to display the following message:  
1
2
Navigate the menu to the <SCENE> screen.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the option  
[TITLEs 1 - 4] for the appropriate scene file.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
ꢄ
7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
4
11  
12  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to YES. Then,  
press the dial button.  
This writes the title into the scene file area of the AJ-  
SPX800E internal memory.  
3
Press the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the title  
entry area, putting the AJ-SPX800E in entry mode.  
To exit the menu, press the MENU button.  
ꢄꢀ6&(1(ꢀ!  
4-10-5 Resetting Menu Option Settings to  
Defaults  
ꢀ5($'ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ6&(1(ꢀ6(/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀ5(6(7  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢁ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢉꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
The menu settings can be reset to their defaults.  
To reset the settings to their defaults, select the menu option  
READ FACTORY DATA in the <INITIALIZE> screen, which is  
accessible from the FILE page.  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢃꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢁꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢊꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
All settings will be reset to their defaults.  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,=(ꢀ!  
4
Turn the JOG dial button until a desired character appears.  
The characters that appear are switched in the following  
order:  
ꢄ
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
Space:  
†
Ð
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
Numerals:  
Ð
0 to 9  
Symbols:  
', >, <, /, -  
<Note>  
5
6
Press the JOG dial button to accept a desired character.  
If an SD card is inserted or removed with the <SD CARD READ/  
WRITE> screen open, the data title cannot be edited.  
Turn the JOG dial button to move the cursor to the next digit  
(clockwise), and repeat Steps 4 - 5 to set characters (up to  
eight characters).  
4-10-6 Lens File Data  
7
8
9
When the title is set, turn the JOG dial button to move the  
cursor to [:].  
The AJ-SPX800E is capable of correcting the lens white  
shading. This lens white shading correction may be stored as  
lens file data (maximum number of data sets is eight). Lens file  
data allows you to quickly perform a proper white shading  
adjustment, even when the lens is replaced.  
For more information on reading/writing data, see [5-3 Mounting  
the lens and Performing the Flange Back and White Shading  
Adjustments].  
Press the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the options  
TITLEs 1 - 4.  
Turn the JOG dial button to return the cursor to the option  
WRITE.  
63  
   
Chapter 5 Preparation  
<For your information>  
5-1  
Power Supply  
The Anton/Bauer battery holder includes both a power supply  
output connector for lighting and a lighting control switch, which  
are convenient when attaching a light. Please contact Anton/  
Bauer for information about the lighting system.  
A battery pack or AC power can be used as the power supply for  
the camera-recorder.  
Using a Battery Pack  
2
Insert the battery and slide it in the direction of the arrow.  
Battery packs from the following manufacturers can be used:  
• Panasonic  
• Anton/Bauer  
• IDX  
• PACO  
• Sony  
<Notes>  
z Other batteries may be used by changing the menu setting,  
but system compatibility is not guaranteed.  
z Charge the battery pack with the battery charger before using  
it. (Please refer to the battery charger’s instruction manual for  
information about charging.)  
Release lever  
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ%$77(5<ꢌ3ꢃ&$5'ꢀ!  
ꢀ%$77(5<ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ352ꢉꢊ  
ꢀ(;7ꢀ'&ꢀ,1ꢀ6(/(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ$&ꢏ$'37  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ&$1&(/ꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ%$77ꢀ5(0$,1ꢀ)8//ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢕꢈꢇ  
<For your information>  
Removing the battery pack  
Completely push down and hold the release lever on the  
battery holder. Then, slide the battery pack in the opposite  
direction to the arrow while holding the lever down.  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ1($5ꢀ(1'ꢀ7,0(ꢀꢀꢅꢃNJO  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ(1'ꢀ$/$50ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ&$5'ꢀ5(0$,1ꢌ  
„
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁNJOꢌ  
„ꢀ  
3
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/P2CARD>  
screen in the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Please refer to [8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1] for more  
information.  
5-1-1  
Mounting the battery and setting the  
battery type  
The following Anton/Bauer batteries can be used:  
• PRO14  
• TRIM14  
Using an Anton/Bauer Battery Pack  
• HYTRON50  
• HYTRON100  
• HYTRON120  
• DIONIC90  
• DIONIC160  
1
Mount the Anton/Bauer battery pack.  
Power supply output  
connector for lighting  
<Note>  
To use DIONIC, please set it as DIONIC90.  
Anton/Bauer  
Battery Pack  
Lighting control  
switch  
64  
     
When using a BP-90 type battery pack.  
Remove the battery holder.  
3
Connect the battery pack plug to the socket inside the  
battery case, and insert the battery pack into the case.  
1
Label  
surface  
Battery holder  
5
2
Attaching the battery case to the camera-recorder.  
ꢀ Connect the cable on the camera-recorder to the cable  
on the battery case (BP-90 type).  
ꢁ Using a screwdriver, secure the battery case (BP-90  
type) to the camera-recorder.  
<Note>  
Open the cover and lift the rubber cap so that the screw  
tightening hole is visible. Tighten the screws to secure  
the battery case to the camera-recorder. Be sure to fully  
tighten the screws.  
Make sure you turn OFF the camera-recorder power before  
connecting or disconnecting the plug.  
4
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/P2CARD>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
Please refer to [8-6-2 BATTERY SETTING1] for more  
information.  
<Notes>  
z Do not use excess force when lifting the rubber caps  
forcibly.  
z Take special care not to pinch the cable.  
Connect  
Battery Case  
(For BP-90 type)  
65  
Using an NP-1 type battery pack.  
3
Setting the battery type.  
Select the battery type listed under BATTERY SELECT.  
Select BATTERY SELECT from the <BATTERY/P2CARD>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page.  
1
2
Remove the battery holder.  
Mount the NP-1 type battery case on the camera-recorder.  
When using a battery not listed under BATTERY SELECT:  
If it is a NiCD battery, select “NiCd14(14V)”, “NiCd13(13V)”,  
or “NiCd12(12V)”, depending on the battery voltage. Set  
the other items according to the battery properties. If it is  
not a NiCd battery, select TYPE A or TYPE B and set the  
other items according to the battery properties.  
Please refer to [8-6-3 BATTERY SETTING2] for more  
information.  
ꢀ Tighten the mounting screws.  
ꢁ Tighten the power contact screws.  
Insert the upper part of the removed cover in the  
direction of the arrow.  
ꢂ Align the holes in the bottom part (metal part) of the  
cover with the holes in the case, and secure the cover  
with the screw.  
<Note>  
<Note>  
When mounting the battery holder, take care not to pinch  
the connection cord.  
For information about the V-mount adapter plate, please  
contact the store where you purchased the camera-  
recorder.  
Battery Case (for NP-1 type)  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢂ
When using a V-mount type battery pack  
Mount the V-mount adapter plate.  
Insert the plate and slide it in the direction of the arrow.  
66  
5-1-2  
Using an AC Power Supply  
5-2  
Mounting the Viewfinder and  
Adjusting its Position  
When using the Panasonic AJ-B75 AC adapter  
Please refer to the viewfinder instruction manual.  
Note: A slide rail is required to mount any viewfinder other than  
models AJ-VF15B or AJ-VF20WB.  
1
Plug the AJ-B75 DC OUT connector into the camera-  
recorder’s external DC input socket.  
z If you need to buy a slide rail, please contact the store where  
you purchased the camera-recorder and tell them that the  
slide rail is a “repair part”.  
Slide rail (VFC3995)  
Screws (XBS3+8VZ)  
Mounting the Slide Rail  
1
Undo the upper two screws for AJ-VF15 or AJ-VF20W, and  
remove the mounting unit.  
Leave the screws attached to the mounting unit.  
5
DC IN Socket  
Mounting unit  
Screws  
AC Adapter  
z AJ-B75 (Optional)  
2
3
Turn the AC adapter power ON.  
Turn the camera-recorder power switch ON.  
When using an external power supply other than the AC  
adapter AJ-B75, check the DC IN socket pin information to  
ensure correct polarity. If a +12V power supply is accidentally  
connected to the GND terminal, this could cause a fire or  
personal injury.  
2
Mount the slide rail, then tighten the two screws.  
Slide rail  
4
Pin No.  
Signal  
3
2
1
2, 3  
4
GND  
—
+12V  
1
DC IN Socket  
<Notes>  
z When both the battery pack and AC adapter are  
connected, power is supplied from the AC adapter. The  
battery can be removed or mounted while using the AC  
adapter.  
z When using the AC adapter, make sure you turn ON the  
AC adapter power before turning ON the camera-  
recorder’s power switch. If this sequence is reversed, the  
camera-recorder may malfunction due to slow rising of  
the AC adapter output voltage.  
z When connecting a battery to the DC IN socket, select  
the battery type listed under EXT DC IN SELECT. Select  
EXT DC IN SELECT from the <BATTERY/P2CARD>  
screen on the MAIN OPERATION page. In this case,  
however, the % display is disabled, even when using a  
digital battery.  
67  
   
Adjusting the Lens Flange Back  
5-3  
Mounting the lens and  
Performing the Flange Back  
and White Shading  
Adjustments  
If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide-  
angle positions during zoom operations, adjust the flange back  
(distance from the lens mounting surface to the image formation  
surface).  
Once adjusted, the flange back does not need to be re-adjusted  
as long as the same lens is mounted on the camera.  
Mounting the Lens  
<Note>  
1
Raise the lens clamping lever and remove the mount cap.  
Please also refer to the lens instruction manual for directions on  
adjustment and locations of individual lens parts.  
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.  
Make sure you connect the lens cable.  
Lens Clamping  
Lever  
Set the lens iris to manual, and fully open the iris.  
Mount Cap  
2
To mount the lens, align the indentation at the top centre of  
the lens mount with the centre mark of the lens.  
Approximately 3m  
Mark  
3
4
Place the flange back adjustment chart about 3 m from the  
lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an  
appropriate video output level.  
If the video level is too high, use the filters or the shutter.  
3
Lower the lens clamping lever to clamp the lens.  
Loosen the F.f (Flange focus) ring clamping screw.  
<Note>  
F.b (Flange back) may be indicated on some lenses.  
5
6
7
Set the zoom ring to the telephoto position, either manually  
or by electric drive.  
Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and turn  
the distance ring to bring the chart into focus.  
4
Secure the cable through the cable clamp, and plug it into  
the LENS connector.  
Set the zoom ring to the wide-angle position and turn the F.f  
ring to bring the chart into focus.  
While focusing, take care not to move the distance ring.  
8
9
Repeat Steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the  
telephoto and wide-angle positions.  
Firmly tighten the F.f ring clamping screw.  
LENS Connector  
5
Adjust the lens flange back.  
<Notes>  
z Please refer to the lens instruction manual for guidance  
on lens handling.  
z When the lens is removed, install the mount cap to  
protect the device.  
68  
   
Adjusting the Lens White Shading  
8
ꢀ Set the WHITE BAL selector switch to A or B, and  
execute Auto White Balance (AWB) with the AUTO W/B  
BAL switch.  
ꢁ Next, execute Auto Black Balance (ABB) with the AUTO  
W/B BAL switch.  
Take the following steps to adjust the white shading:  
<Note>  
Vertical colouring may occur near the open position of the lens  
iris, even after adjusting the white shading. This phenomenon,  
however, is a characteristic of the lens or optical system. It does  
not indicate a malfunction.  
Repeat Auto White Balance (ABB) with the AUTO W/B  
BAL switch.  
9
Repeat the adjustment described in Step 7.  
1
2
Mount the lens on the camera.  
Be sure to connect the lens cable.  
10  
Activate the MENU and go to the MAINTENANCE page to  
open the <WHITE SHADING> screen.  
Set the electronic shutter to [OFF], the gain to [L (0dB)],  
and the ASPECT option to “16:9”. Select the ASPECT  
option from the SYSTEM MODE screen on the SYSTEM  
SETTING page.  
11  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to  
DETECTION (V.SAW). Then, press the JOG Dial button to  
execute white shading compensation.  
5
3
4
If the lens has an extender, disable the extender feature.  
ꢄꢀ:+,7(ꢀ6+$',1*ꢀ!  
Operate the MENU and go to the PAINT page to open the  
<GAMMA> screen. Confirm that the GAMMA MODE SEL  
is set to STD. From the VF page, open the <VF DISPLAY>  
screen to confirm that ZEBRA1 DETECT, ZEBRA2  
DETECT, and ZEBRA2 are set as shown in the diagram  
below. If they are not, correct the settings and then close  
the MENU screen.  
ꢀ&255(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ21  
ꢀ'(7(&7,21ꢀꢍ9ꢀ6$:ꢎ  
ꢄ
ꢄ
ꢄꢀ9)ꢀ',63/$<ꢀ!  
ꢀ',63ꢀ&21',7,21ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ1250$/  
ꢀ',63ꢀ02'(ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ9)ꢀ287ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ<  
ꢀ9)ꢀ'7/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢉꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢕꢈꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀ'(7(&7ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢈꢑꢆꢇ  
ꢀ=(%5$ꢃꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ6327  
ꢀ/2:ꢀ/,*+7ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢁꢆꢇ  
ꢀ(&8ꢀ0(18ꢀ',63ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀꢆꢈ0ꢀ,1',&$725ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅ2))  
ꢀ0$5.(5ꢌ&+$5ꢀ/9/ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢆꢈꢇ  
12  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
5
6
Set the Viewfinder ZEBRA switch to ON.  
ꢀ'(7(&7"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢀꢀ12  
Aim the lens at a sheet of white paper that has no colour  
shading.  
ꢄ
<Note>  
13  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES]. Then  
press the JOG Dial button.  
[ACTIVE] appears on the screen to indicate that the white  
shading automatic adjustment is running.  
Flickering naturally occurs when fluorescent, mercury or  
other such lamps are used for lighting. Therefore, use a  
light source that does not flicker, such as sunlight or  
halogen lamps.  
[W-SHD OK] appears when the adjustment is completed.  
7
Set the lens iris to manual and adjust the lens iris so that  
the ZEBRA pattern covers the entire screen.  
<Note>  
This compensation may not be possible when [LEVEL  
OVER] is displayed, depending on the KNEE setting. In this  
case, first narrow the lens iris or set the OUTPUT switch  
AUTO KNEE to OFF. Next, activate the MENU to open the  
PAINT screen. From the PAINT screen, open the <KNEE/  
LEVEL> screen and set MANUAL KNEE to OFF. Then  
repeat Steps 4 to 9.  
Make sure that the lens iris is set between F4 and F11.  
<Notes>  
z The ZEBRA pattern will not cover the entire screen if the  
lighting is uneven. In this case, adjust the lighting (e.g.,  
change the position of the light source).  
z Even if the lens iris is not set between F4 and F11, adjust  
the lighting (e.g., change the position of the light source).  
z Make sure that the electronic shutter is set to OFF.  
After [W-SHD OK] is displayed, re-set MANUAL KNEE back  
to ON.  
14  
If the lens has an extender or a ratio converter, enable the  
feature and repeat Steps 7 to 13 for each feature.  
Three patterns of compensation values (with an extender,  
with a ratio converter, and without any features) will be  
stored as one set of lens file data in the camera-recorder.  
69  
This completes the white shading adjustment.  
The compensation values are stored in the non-volatile internal  
memory. Therefore, re-adjusting the white shading is not  
required, even after the camera-recorder power has been turned  
off.  
6
Press the JOG Dial button again and turn it until a desired  
letter for the title appears.  
Turning the JOG Dial button changes the letter displayed in  
the following sequence:  
Space:  
†
Ð
Storing the Lens File Data  
Alphabetical characters: A to Z  
Ð
The white shading compensation values can be stored in the  
internal memory as lens file data.  
Numerals:  
Ð
0 to 9  
Symbols:  
', >, <, /, -  
Selecting the File number  
7
8
Press the JOG Dial button to confirm the letter.  
1
2
Activate the MENU and go to the FILE page to open the  
<LENS> screen. Turn the JOG Dial to move the cursor to  
the item FILE NO.  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to the next  
position (to the right), and repeat Steps 6 to 7 to set the  
letters for the title. (Up to 12 letters)  
Press the JOG Dial button and FILE NO. will start blinking.  
Turn the JOG Dial button to select the desired lens file (1-8)  
to be stored.  
9
When the title input is completed, turn the JOG Dial button  
to move the cursor to the [:] position.  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
10  
11  
12  
Press the JOG Dial button. The cursor returns to [TITLE:].  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [WRITE:].  
ꢄ
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢕꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢑꢅ  
3
Press the JOG Dial button to confirm the lens file.  
Adding a Title to the Selected File No.  
ꢀ:5,7("  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
4
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [TITLE:].  
7,7/(ꢅ  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
13  
14  
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES].  
Then, press the JOG Dial button.  
[WRITE OK] will appear after writing is completed,  
indicating that the set data and the title have been stored in  
the lens file area of the camera’s internal memory.  
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢄ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢕꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢑꢅ  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operation.  
5
Press the JOG Dial button. The cursor moves to the title  
input field, and input mode is enabled.  
ꢄꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(ꢀ!  
ꢀ),/(ꢀ12ꢂꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢅꢉ  
ꢀꢀ5($'  
ꢀꢀ:5,7(  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ  
ꢁ
ꢀ7,7/(ꢀꢅꢀꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒꢒ  
ꢀꢉꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢆꢅ  
ꢀꢃꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢋꢅ  
ꢀꢁꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢕꢅ  
ꢀꢊꢅꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢑꢅ  
70  
Reading out the Lens File Data  
Resetting Lens File Data to Factory Standard Settings  
The lens file data can be reset to the standard setting values that  
were set when the camera was shipped from the factory.  
From the FILE page, open the <INITIALISE> screen.  
1
Select the lens file No. to read out by following Steps 1 to 3  
in the [Storing the Lens File Data] section.  
2
3
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [READ:].  
1
From the INITIALIZE screen, select [RESET LENS FILES].  
Press the JOG Dial button and the following message  
appears.  
ꢄꢀ,1,7,$/,6(ꢀ!  
ꢄ
ꢀ5($'ꢀ)$&725<ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ:5,7(ꢀ86(5ꢀ'$7$  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ/(16ꢀ),/(6  
5
ꢀ5($'"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
2
When the JOG Dial button is pressed, the message shown  
below appears.  
4
5
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES].  
Then, press the JOG Dial button.  
[READ OK] will be displayed after the stored lens file data  
has been read out.  
Press the MENU button to exit the menu operation.  
ꢀ5(6(7ꢀ$//ꢀ/(16ꢀ'$7$"  
ꢀꢀ<(6  
ꢄ
ꢀꢀ12  
3
Turn the JOG Dial button to move the cursor to [YES], then  
press the JOG Dial button.  
[OK] is displayed, resetting the lens file data to the factory  
default values.  
71  
5-4-2  
When Using a Wireless Receiver  
5-4  
Preparing for Audio Input  
Take the following steps to prepare the camera for connecting  
audio input devices.  
Using an External Wireless Receiver  
Mount a wireless receiver when using a wireless system.  
5-4-1  
When Using the Front Microphone  
1
2
Mount the wireless receiver on the camera attachment.  
The AJ-MC700P microphone kit (optional) includes  
microphone that can be mounted on the camera.  
a
Align the grooves in the camera attachment with the pins on  
the unit (e.g., the battery case), and mount the wireless  
receiver.  
1
Open the microphone holder.  
Audio Output Jack  
Wireless Receiver  
2
Mount the microphone and tighten the clamping screw.  
ClampingScrew  
Camera Attachment  
XLR Cable  
AUDIO IN Jack  
AUDIO IN Switch  
3
Connect the microphone cable to the MIC IN jack on the  
camera.  
3
4
5
Connect the wireless receiver to the AUDIO IN jack with the  
XLR cable.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the channel to which  
the XLR cable is connected.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear panel to  
[MIC].  
To remove the wireless receiver, raise the lever on the  
bottom of the camera attachment.  
MIC IN Jack  
<Note>  
Please refer to the wireless receiver’s instruction manual for  
such information as operation of the wireless receiver.  
4
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [FRONT] depending on the  
audio channel to be recorded.  
AUDIO IN  
Switch  
72  
     
When Using the Unislot® Wireless Receiver  
5-5  
Mounting the Camera on a  
Tripod  
1
Remove the cover to insert the wireless receiver and  
secure it with the screws.  
When mounting the camera on a tripod, use the tripod  
attachment supplied with the camera.  
1
Mount the tripod attachment on the tripod.  
Tripod Attachment  
Pan head  
5
2
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [W.L.] depending on the audio  
channel to be recorded.  
<Note>  
Select an appropriate hole in the attachment, taking into  
account the centre of gravity of the camera and tripod  
attachment combined.  
Also, make sure that the diameter of the selected hole  
matches the diameter of the pan head screw.  
5-4-3  
When Using Audio Devices  
1
2
3
Connect the audio device to the AUDIO IN jack with the  
XLR cable.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch to [REAR] for the channel to which  
the XLR cable is connected.  
2
Mount the camera on the tripod attachment.  
Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you hear a  
“click”.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switch on the rear panel to  
[LINE].  
LINE/MIC/+48V  
Selector Switch  
Removing the Camera from the Tripod Attachment  
Tripod Attachment  
AUDIO IN Jack  
Red Lever  
Black Lever  
AUDIO IN Switch  
While holding the red lever down, move the black lever in the  
direction of the arrow, and slide the camera backward to remove  
it.  
<Note>  
If the tripod attachment pin does not return to its original position  
after the camera has been removed, hold the red lever down and  
move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again, in order  
to return the pin to its original position.  
Please note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin  
remains in the centre.  
73  
   
5-6  
Attaching the Shoulder Strap  
5-8  
Connecting the AJ-EC3E  
Extension Controller  
Shoulder Strap  
Some functions can be remote-controlled when the AJ-EC3E  
extension control unit (optional) is connected to the camera.  
When the AJ-EC3E is connected, the camera automatically  
enters remote control mode after the power switches of both the  
camera and the AJ-EC3E are turned ON.  
Press to open  
the hook.  
Controller Cable  
AJ-  
ꢆ
w
ꢇ
ꢅ
To detach the shoulder strap, first open the hooks, then detach  
the strap.  
<Note>  
Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.  
ECUConnector  
AJ-EC3E  
5-7  
Attaching the Rain Cover  
When using the SHAN-RC700 Rain Cover  
<Notes>  
z Be sure to turn OFF both the camera and the AJ-EC3E power  
switches before connecting or disconnecting the controller  
cable.  
z If ECU DATA SAVE is set to OFF, the camera-related setting  
values, which have been adjusted or set using the AJ-EC3E,  
will be cancelled when the camera power switch is turned  
OFF. Also, the setting values cannot be written to an SD card.  
However, the menu settings performed using the AJ-EC3E  
can be written to an SD card. Next time the AJ-EC3E is  
connected, the setting values will return to the AJ-EC3E  
settings.  
ECU DATA SAVE can be selected from the <SW MODE>  
screen on the CAM OPERATION page.  
Tighten the cord  
z If ECU DATA SAVE is set to ON, the values adjusted or set  
using the AJ-EC3E are retained, even after the camera power  
switch is turned OFF.  
z The USER switch on the camera does not function when the  
AJ-EC3E is connected.  
z When controlling the shutter from the AJ-EC3E, the shutter  
speeds correspond to the speeds set by the menu on the  
camera, not the speeds written on the AJ-EC3E. The shutter  
speeds correspond as follows:  
Secure with the  
surface fastener  
AJ-EC3E  
Camera Shutter Speeds  
Shutter Speed Indication  
Secure with the surface fastener  
100 (60)  
120  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITION3  
POSITION4  
POSITION5  
POSITION6  
250  
500  
1000  
2000  
74  
       
5-9  
Attaching the Front Audio  
Level Control Knob  
If you use the Front Audio Level control frequently, attach the  
accessory knob so that it can be easily operated.  
Front Audio  
LevelControl  
Knob  
(Accessory)  
Screw  
(Accessory)  
Marks  
Screw  
Î
5
Remove the screw in the centre of the Front Audio Level control,  
and attach the accessory knob using the screw (included). When  
attaching the knob, be sure to align the marks on the control with  
the marks on the knob.  
75  
 
Chapter 6 Manipulating Clips with Thumbnails  
A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices created from one shooting session, together with additional information  
such as voice memos and meta data.  
The following manipulations can be performed using the cursor and SET buttons, while checking the images displayed on the LCD  
monitor:  
z Playback, delete or restore the clip.  
z Add a voice memo to the clip.  
z Add or delete a shot mark on the clip thumbnail.  
z Format P2 cards and SD cards.  
6-1  
Thumbnail Manipulations Overview  
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:  
THUMBNAIL  
OPERATION  
PROPERTY  
DELETE  
FORMAT  
REPAIR CLIP  
EXIT  
ALL CLIP  
CLIP PROPERTY  
CARD STATUS  
EXIT  
SELECTED CLIPS  
MARKED CLIPS  
VOICEMEMO CLIPS  
SLOT CLIPS  
SETUP  
EXIT  
MARKED IND.  
VOICEMEMO IND.  
WIDE IND.  
DATA DISPLAY  
DATE FORMAT  
THUMBNAIL SIZE  
EXIT  
76  
     
6-2  
Thumbnail Screen  
Time Display  
Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen  
on the LCD monitor. Pressing the THUMBNAIL button again  
returns the display to the regular display. When switching is done  
from the regular screen display to the thumbnail screen display,  
all the clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen.  
Also, pressing the MENU BAR button in the thumbnail screen  
moves the pointer to the menu bar and enables thumbnail menu  
manipulation.  
You can set this to display the time code at the start of clip  
recording, the user bits at the start of clip recording, the  
shooting time, the shooting date or the shooting and date.  
Please refer to [6-12 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode]  
for more information.  
The factory setting is the time code at the start of clip  
recording.  
Menu Bar  
<Note>  
The Menu Bar includes menus for manipulating clips and  
switching/setting the thumbnail display.  
Press the MENU BAR button on the thumbnail screen to  
manipulate the menu bar. Use the cursor (ꢁꢀ) and SET  
buttons to select the menu.  
With the TCG switch positioned at [SET], when the time code or  
user bits are set or when camera menus are being manipulated,  
thumbnails cannot be manipulated.  
THUMBNAIL:  
To switch the thumbnail display and set the display mode.  
OPERATION:  
To delete clips and format a P2 card.  
PROPERTY:  
6
To display clip properties and P2 card status.  
EXIT:  
To return the pointer to the thumbnail.  
Incomplete Clip Indicator  
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across multiple P2  
cards, one of these cards is not inserted into a P2 card slot.  
Thumbnail Screen  
Voice Memo Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a voice memo  
attached. Please refer to [6-7 Voice Memo] for more  
information about voice memos.  
Display Mode  
Indicates the thumbnail types displayed on the screen.  
ALL:  
SELECTED:  
Display randomly selected clips.  
MARKED: Display clips with shot marks.  
VOICE MEMO:  
Display all clips.  
Wide Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9  
aspect ratio.  
Shot Mark Indicator  
Display clips with voice memo data.  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot mark attached.  
Please refer to [6-6 Shot Mark] for more information about  
shot marks.  
SLOT:  
Display clips in the specified P2 card.  
Please refer to [6-5 Switching the Thumbnail Display] for  
more information.  
Defective Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed for defective clips, which may result  
from a variety of causes, e.g., powering-down during  
recording.  
A clip displayed with a yellow corrupt marker can be  
restored. Please refer to [6-9 Restoring Clips] for more  
information.  
A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker cannot be  
restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be deleted,  
format the P2 card.  
Slot Number  
Indicates the P2 card in which the clip under the pointer is  
recorded. The slot number of the P2 card that contains the  
clip is displayed in yellow.  
If the clip is recorded across multiple P2 cards, all the slot  
numbers of the P2 cards that contain the clip are displayed.  
The slot numbers of the other P2 cards, if inserted, are  
displayed in white.  
Clip Number  
The numbers set by the camera for all the clips recognised  
correctly by the P2 card. These numbers are allocated in  
chronological order, by shooting dates and times.  
Thumbnail  
The image captured immediately after you start shooting is  
displayed as a thumbnail.  
77  
 
6-3  
Selecting Thumbnails  
6-4  
Playing Back Clips  
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in the thumbnail  
screen.  
1
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
1
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer (yellow frame)  
to the desired clip and press the SET button.  
The frame around the selected thumbnail changes to a blue  
frame. Press the SET button again to deselect the clip.  
2
3
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the desired  
clip.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button, and the clip under the  
pointer will be played back on the LCD monitor.  
After playback of the clip under the pointer, subsequent  
clips are played back in order, according to when they were  
shot. The thumbnail screen returns after the last clip has  
been played back.  
2
Additional clips can be selected by repeating Step 1.  
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails in the  
thumbnail screen for playback. Please refer to [6-5 Switching the  
Thumbnail Display] for more information.  
<Note>  
When playing back clips, it is not necessary to “select” the  
clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).  
4
5
During playback, pressing the REW button starts 4C speed  
reverse playback, and the FF button starts 4C speed fast  
playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to return to  
normal playback.  
MENU BAR  
Button  
During clip playback, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button will  
temporarily stop (pause) the process.  
LCD Monitor  
During a pause, pressing the REW button changes the  
pause position to the beginning of the previous clip, and the  
FF button changes the pause position to the beginning of  
the next clip.  
THUMBNAIL Button  
CURSOR Buttons  
SET Button  
6
Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the  
playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.  
<Note>  
When playback is stopped, the position of the pointer  
remains on the clip that was being played back, regardless  
of where the playback started. However, when the  
THUMBNAIL button is pressed to close the thumbnail  
screen, the pointer will move to the starting clip (i.e., the clip  
with the earliest recording date and time), not the clip on  
which the pointer was last positioned.  
78  
   
6-5  
Switching the Thumbnail  
Display  
6-6  
Shot Mark  
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish this  
clip from the others.  
The display can be switched so that only those clips matching  
the specified conditions are displayed in the thumbnail screen.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to  
which you want to attach a shot mark.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
Press the Shot Mark button.  
6
MENU BAR Button  
Shot Mark Button  
3
Move the pointer over THUMBNAIL and press the SET  
button to select it. A sub-menu appears. Switch the  
thumbnail display by selecting one of the following items:  
4
A shot mark will be attached to the clip thumbnail under the  
pointer.  
To delete a shot mark, reposition the pointer over the clip  
and press the Shot Mark button.  
<Notes>  
z A shot mark can be attached during recording. Please refer to  
[3-9 Shot Mark Function] for more information.  
z When adding a shot mark to (or deleting the shot mark from) a  
clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all these  
P2 cards inserted into P2 card slots.  
ALL CLIPS:  
Display all clips.  
SELECTED CLIPS:  
Display randomly selected clips.  
MARKED CLIPS:  
Display clips with shot marks attached.  
VOICE MEMO CLIPS:  
Display clips with voice memo data attached.  
SLOT CLIPS:  
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in the  
specified slot.  
When this item is selected, SLOT1 to SLOT5 are displayed  
as a sub-menu. Select the desired slot to display the clips.  
SET UP:  
Please refer to [6-12 Setting the Thumbnail Display Mode]  
for information about this item.  
EXIT:  
Close the sub-menu.  
79  
     
6-7  
Voice Memo  
5
6
Press the left/right cursor buttons (ꢁꢀ) to move the pointer  
over the still image that is related to the voice memo you  
wish to play back. Then, press the SET button.  
A voice memo is audio data that can be attached to the clip  
separately from the voice recorded during shooting.  
<Note>  
The voice memo will be played back.  
A voice memo can be attached during recording. Please refer to  
[3-8 Voice Memo Function] for more information.  
During voice memo playback, the still image related to the  
voice memo is displayed on the LCD monitor and the  
viewfinder. The video output signal is also the still image.  
To stop the voice memo playback, press the STOP button.  
6-7-1  
Playing Back Voice Memos  
7
To return the pointer to the thumbnail display after playback  
of a voice memo, press the MENU BAR button to move the  
pointer to the menu bar, and then select EXIT.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
<Note>  
The voice memo playback signal is emitted through the  
speaker and the PHONES jack on the camera. This signal  
is not emitted from the AUDIO OUT jack.  
From the MENU BAR, select THUMBNAIL ꢀ VOICE  
MEMO CLIPS.  
The clip thumbnails with voice memos attached are  
displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The  
lower section of the LCD monitor shows information about  
the voice memo on the clip selected by the pointer.  
6-7-2  
Recording a Voice Memo  
During thumbnail display, voice memos can be added to the clip  
on which the pointer is positioned.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip to  
which you want to attach a voice memo.  
Thumbnail  
Display  
Press the Voice Memo button and record the voice memo  
through the Voice Memo Microphone.  
“VOICE REC” is displayed at the top of the screen.  
<Notes>  
z When a voice memo is attached during thumbnail display,  
the voice memo is related to the first still image of the clip.  
Please refer to [3-8 Voice Memo Function] for more  
information.  
Shows the still image that  
the voice memo is related to.  
z When the power is abruptly turned off while a voice  
memo is being recorded during playback of a clip, the clip  
will not be affected by this, but the voice memo will not be  
recorded.  
Shows the total number of voice  
memos attached to the clip.  
4
Move the pointer over the clip that contains the desired  
voice memo to playback and press the SET button.  
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD monitor.  
Voice Memo  
Microphone  
Voice Memo Button  
4
Press the Voice Memo button or the stop button again to  
stop recording.  
The pointer moves down.  
80  
         
6-7-3  
Deleting Voice Memos  
6-9  
Restoring Clips  
Restores clips that are defective as a result of sudden powering-  
down during recording, or removal of the P2 card being  
accessed.  
1
2
3
Perform Steps 1 to 4 in the [6-7-1 Playing Back Voice  
Memos] section to select the voice memo in the clip.  
Move the pointer over the clip you want to delete, and press  
the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the menu bar.  
<Note>  
Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip markers can be  
restored. Delete the clips with red corrupt clip markers. If the clip  
cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.  
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective-clip  
indicator may change from yellow to red, resulting in inability to  
restore the clips.  
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ DELETE.  
YES and NO appear to confirm deletion. Use the cursor  
buttons and the SET button to select YES.  
The voice memo is deleted.  
1
2
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
6-8  
1
Deleting Clips  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you  
want to restore (defective clips are indicated by corrupt clip  
marks).  
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
6
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
2
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer over the clip you  
want to delete.  
Press the SET button to select the clip.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button, and select OPERATION ꢀ  
REPAIR CLIP from the menu bar.  
The confirmation window appears. Use the cursor buttons  
and the SET button to select YES.  
3
4
Press the MENU BAR button and select OPERATION ꢀ  
DELETE from the menu bar.  
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons and  
the SET button to select YES.  
5
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-green frames)  
are deleted by this operation.  
81  
         
6-10 Formatting a P2 Card  
6-11 Formatting SD Cards  
SD cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen. With  
an SD card inserted into the camera-recorder, perform the  
following operation:  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ FORMAT.  
The following screen appears. Select the slot number for  
the P2 card you want to format.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
Select EXIT if formatting is not required.  
From the menu bar, select OPERATION ꢀ FORMAT. The  
following screen appears. Select “SD-CARD”.  
Select “EXIT” if formatting is not required.  
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons and  
the SET button to select YES.  
4
The following screen appears. Use the cursor buttons and  
the SET button to select YES.  
5
The selected P2 card is formatted.  
5
The SD card is formatted.  
<Note>  
SD cards can also be formatted from the menu screen. For more  
information, see [4-10-2 Formatting, Writing and Reading an SD  
Card].  
82  
     
6-12 Setting the Thumbnail Display  
Mode  
6-13 Properties  
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are displayed.  
The thumbnail display mode can be customised to suit your  
preferences.  
6-13-1 Clip Property  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ CLIP PROPERTY.  
The following screen appears.  
1
2
3
Press the THUMBNAIL button.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD monitor.  
Press the MENU BAR button. The pointer moves to the  
menu bar.  
From the menu bar, select THUMBNAILꢃꢀ SETUP.  
The following screen appears.  
6
Clip Number  
Thumbnail  
Slip Information  
Displays the number of markers and voice memos attached  
to the clip.  
MARKER IND.:  
Switches the shot mark marker between indication and no  
indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON (indication).  
VOICE MEMO IND.:  
The  
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a write-  
protected P2 card.  
Switches the voice memo marker between indication and  
no indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON  
(indication).  
Slot Number  
Clip Information  
Displays detailed information about the clip.  
WIDE IND.:  
Switches the wide marker between indication and no  
indication (ON/OFF). The factory setting is ON (indication).  
DATA DISPLAY:  
The time display field of the clip offers a choice of Time  
Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting Time (TIME) or  
Shooting Date (DATE)/Shooting Time and Date (Time  
DATE). The factory setting is Time Code.  
DATE FORMAT:  
You can specify the display order for the shooting date as  
either Year/Month/Day (YMD), Month/Day/Year (MDY) or  
Day/Month/Year (DMY). The factory setting is Year/Month/  
Day.  
START TC:  
The time code value at the start of the recording.  
START UB:  
The user bit value at the start of the recording.  
TIMEꢀ  
DATE:  
The time at the start of the recording.  
The date of the recording.  
DURATION:  
The time length of the clip.  
CODEC: The recording format of the clip.  
This setting is reflected in the recording date shown in the  
clip property and the shooting date shown when DATE is  
selected under the item DATA DISPLAY.  
THUMBNAIL SIZE:  
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one screen, either  
LARGE (3 C 2 thumbnails displayed) or NORMAL (4 C 3  
thumbnails displayed) can be selected. The factory default  
value is NORMAL.  
EXIT:  
Returns to the previous menu.  
83  
     
6-13-2 P2 Card Status Display  
From the menu bar, select PROPERTY ꢀ CARD STATUS. The  
following screen appears.  
Clip Meta Data  
Displays more detailed data about the clip. Use the cursor  
buttons to move the pointer, and press the SET button to  
check the detailed content. The underlined items are  
automatically set during shooting. Other items can be input  
on your personal computer, etc.  
GLOBAL CLIP ID:  
Displays the global clip ID indicating the shooting  
conditions of the clip.  
VIDEO: Displays [FRAME RATE] (clip frame rate), [PULL  
DOWN] (pulldown method), and [ASPECT RATIO]  
(aspect ratio).  
AUDIO: Displays [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency  
of recorded voice) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]  
(quantifying bit number of recorded voice).  
USER CLIP NAME:  
Displays the user-set clip name. The initial value  
is the global clip ID.  
Write-protect Mark  
ACCESS: Displays [CREATOR] (name of the person who  
recorded the clip), [CREATION DATE] (date and  
time the clip was recorded), and [LAST UPDATE  
PERSON] (the last person who updated the clip).  
DEVICE: Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the  
manufacturer of the recording equipment),  
[SERIAL NO.] (serial number of the recording  
equipment), and [MODEL NAME] (model name of  
the recording equipment).  
SHOOT: Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the shooter),  
[START DATE] (shooting start date and time),  
[END DATE] (shooting end date and time), and  
[LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/LATITUDE/  
SOURCE/PLACE NAME (shooting location’s  
latitude/longitude/altitude/source of the  
information/name).  
The  
mark appears if the P2 card is write-protected.  
P2 Card Status  
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is indicated  
by a bar graph and percentage.  
The following indications may appear, depending on the  
card status:  
FORMAT ERROR:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera.  
NO CARD:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and total capacity  
in minutes. The total of the remaining memory capacity for  
each P2 card that is displayed may not match the actual  
total remaining memory capacity for the P2 cards because  
only the figure in minute is displayed.  
SCENARIO:  
Displays [PROGRAM NAME] (program name),  
[SCENE NO.] (scene number), and [TAKE NO.]  
(take number).  
NEWS: Displays  
[REPORTER]  
(reporter  
name),  
[PURPOSE] (purpose of coverage), and  
[OBJECT] (coverage target).  
Slots Total  
Displays the total capacity of the 5 slots.  
Please note that the remaining capacity of a write-protected  
P2 card is not included in the total remaining capacity.  
MEMO: Displays [PERSON] (person who records the text  
memo added to the clip) and [TEXT] (content of  
the text memo). Two or more text memos can be  
recorded for a single clip, but this camera-recorder  
can only recognise the first text memo.  
<Note>  
This camera-recorder can only display printable ASCII  
characters.  
84  
 
Chapter 7 Maintenance and Inspections  
7-1-2  
Inspecting the Camera Unit  
7-1  
Inspections Before Shooting  
Make sure you check that the system is operating normally  
before embarking on a shoot. We recommend using a colour  
video monitor to check the image.  
1
Set the zoom to electric zoom mode and check the zoom  
operation.  
Check that the image changes to telephoto and wide angle.  
7-1-1  
Preparing for Inspections  
2
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom  
operation.  
Turn the manual zoom lever to check that the image  
changes to telephoto and wide angle.  
1
2
Mount a charged battery pack.  
Turn the power switch ON and check that 5 or more BATT  
indication marks appear.  
3
Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and aim the lens  
at objects with different degrees of brightness, to check that  
the automatic iris adjustment operates normally.  
z If fewer than 5 BATT indication marks appear, replace the  
battery with a fully-charged battery.  
4
5
Set the iris to manual adjustment mode and turn the iris  
ring, to check the manual iris adjustment.  
1
7
While holding down the instant iris automatic adjustment  
button, aim the lens at objects with different degrees of  
brightness, to check that the instant iris automatic  
adjustment operates properly.  
6
7
Return the iris to automatic adjustment mode and change  
the GAIN switch setting to L, M, and H, to check the  
following items:  
2
z The iris is adjusted for objects with the same brightness  
according to the switch setting.  
z The gain value displayed on the viewfinder screen  
changes according to the switch setting.  
3
Insert a P2 card into the card slot and close the slide cover.  
Confirm that the P2 card access LED for the inserted card  
slot lights up in orange. If P2 cards are inserted into  
multiple card slots, only the P2 card access LED for the  
first-inserted P2 card lights up in orange. Then, the other  
P2 card access LEDs light up in green when P2 cards are  
inserted.  
When a lens with an extender is mounted, set the extender  
to the operating position to check that the extender  
operates properly.  
If the access LED for the P2 card slot in which a P2 card is  
inserted keeps blinking in green, or if there is no display,  
recording is not possible on that particular P2 card.  
3
85  
         
2. Inspecting the Audio Level Automatic Adjustment  
7-1-3  
Inspecting the Memory Recording  
Functions  
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to [AUTO].  
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
Make sure you successively carry out the inspections from [1.  
Inspecting the P2 Card Recording] to [4. Inspecting the  
Earphone and Speaker].  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN jack at an  
appropriate sound source. Then, check that the level  
displays for both CH1 and CH2 change according to the  
sound level.  
1. Inspecting the P2 Card Recording  
1
Check on the display inside the viewfinder that the  
remaining P2 card recording capacity is sufficient. Please  
refer to [P2 Card Remaining Free Space/capacity  
Indication] for information about P2 card remaining  
recording capacity.  
3. Inspecting the Audio Level Manual Adjustment  
1
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [FRONT].  
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 and CH2 switches to [MAN].  
2
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [TC].  
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 and CH2 controls.  
Check that the level display increases when the controls  
are turned to the right.  
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button to check the  
following items:  
z The P2 access LED blinks in orange.  
z The REC lamp inside the viewfinder lights up.  
z System warnings do not appear inside the viewfinder.  
4. Inspecting the Earphone and Speaker  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the speaker  
volume changes.  
5
6
Press the camera’s REC START/STOP button again.  
This step confirms that the P2 access LED is on and  
showing orange, and the REC lamp in the viewfinder is  
turned off.  
Connect an earphone to the PHONES jack.  
Check that the speaker is turned off and the microphone  
sound can be heard from the earphone.  
Using the REC button on the handle, repeat Steps 4 to 5 to  
check the same operation. Check the VTR button on the  
lens in the same way.  
3
Turn the MONITOR control to check that the earphone  
volume changes.  
7
8
Press the LIGHT button to check that the screen brightness  
in the display window increases.  
5. Inspection for Using an External Microphone  
Press the PLAY button to check that the clip that has just  
been shot is played back from the beginning.  
Check that recording and playback operate properly.  
1
Connect an external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 and  
CH2 connectors.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 switches to [REAR].  
9
When multiple P2 cards are inserted into the P2 card slots,  
press the USER MAIN button to select the P2 card used for  
recording.  
Repeat the operations in Steps 4 to 5 and 8 to check that  
recording and playback operate properly.  
Set the LINE/MIC/+48V selector switches on the rear panel  
to [MIC] or [+48V], depending on the power supply type of  
the external microphone.  
MIC:  
For a microphone with internal power supply.  
+48V: For a microphone with external power supply.  
4
Aim the microphone at a sound source. Then check that the  
audio level meter in the display window and the audio level  
display inside the viewfinder change according to the sound  
level.  
The channels can also be checked separately by  
connecting a single microphone to each channel.  
86  
 
6. Inspection of the clock, time code, and user bits  
7-2  
Maintenance  
1
Set the user’s bit as required.  
Please refer to [4-5-1 Setting the User Bits] for the setting  
procedures.  
7-2-1  
Cleaning Inside the Viewfinder  
z Do not use thinner or other solvents to remove dirt from the  
viewfinder.  
2
Set the time code.  
Please refer to [4-5-3 Setting the Time Code] for the setting  
procedures.  
z Wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaner.  
z DO NOT wipe the mirror. If dirt or rubbish is sticking on the  
mirror, remove it with a commercially available air blower.  
3
4
Set the TCG switch to [R-RUN].  
7-2-2  
Phenomenon Inherent to CCD  
Cameras  
Press the REC START/STOP button.  
Check that the counter display number changes as  
recording progresses.  
Smears  
Smears may appear when shooting an object with very high  
brightness.  
This phenomenon may appear more frequently as the electronic  
shutter speed increases.  
5
6
7
Press the REC START/STOP button again.  
Check that recording stops and the counter display number  
stops changing.  
Set the TCG switch to [F-RUN].  
Check that the counter display number changes regardless  
of recording status.  
7-2-3  
Replacing the Backup Battery  
7
The camera is shipped from the factory with a backup battery  
already mounted.  
When the battery runs out, the [BACK UP BATT EMPTY] display  
appears on the viewfinder screen for 3 seconds after the power  
switch is turned ON.  
The internal clock stops operating when the battery runs out.  
Also, the TCG time code value returns to [00:00:00:00], and the  
time code backup is disabled. The battery must be replaced.  
Please consult your nearest service centre for replacement with  
a new battery (CR2032).  
Set the DISPLAY switch to [UB].  
Each time the HOLD button is pressed, make sure that the  
displayed value changes in the following sequence: VTCG  
ꢀ DATE ꢀ TIME ꢀ No display (time zone) ꢀ TCG; and  
also verify that the displayed value is correct.  
If DATE, TIME, or time zone is not correct, refer to [4-5-2  
Setting the Internal Clock’s Date and Time] for guidance on  
setting the correct values.  
<Note>  
Note that date and time data set for DATE, TIME, and time  
zone is recorded in clips, and affects the playback  
sequence, etc. at the time of thumbnail manipulations.  
The backup battery is visible when the panel on the LCD monitor  
side is removed (right side when viewed from the front).  
<Note>  
Please contact the store where you purchased the camera or  
an authorised service provider when replacing the battery.  
87  
       
7-2-4  
Connector Signals  
AUDIO OUT  
GND  
DC IN  
GND  
AUDIO IN  
GND  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
L CH OUT (H)  
L CH OUT (C)  
R CH OUT (H)  
R CH OUT (C)  
NC  
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
NC  
+12V  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AB103A0007  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16PRM-3SG  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AA104H0024  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RX-4P(SW1)  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
Panasonic Part No.  
Manufacturer Part No. HA16RD-5P  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
K1AA105H0007  
PUSH  
4
3
2
1
2
1
3
1
5
4
2
<Note>  
3
Confirm correct polarity when using an  
external power supply.  
GPS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
GPS TXA  
GPS RXA  
GPS VBAT  
START  
FRONT MIC IN  
GND  
ECU  
CAM CONT  
CAM DATA  
NC  
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
AUDIO IN (H)  
AUDIO IN (C)  
GPS VCC  
GPS GND  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AB103B0013  
ECU ON  
UNREG 12V  
GND  
Manufacturer Part No. NC3FBH2  
(Eye-Trek)  
Panasonic Part No.  
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-6SC  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
K1AB106J0010  
Panasonic Part No.  
K1AB106J0010  
PUSH  
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-6SC  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
6
4
1
3
2
1
5
2
6
4
1
3
3
5
2
<Note>  
The camera’s REC START/STOP is  
allocated to pin No. 4.  
DC OUT  
GND  
1
2
3
4
NC  
NC  
+12V  
Panasonic Part No.  
VJS3824A004  
Manufacturer Part No. HR10A-7R-4SC  
(Hirose Electric Co.)  
1
4
3
2
88  
 
7-3  
Warning System  
7-3-1  
Warning Description Tables  
If a problem is detected immediately after the power is turned on, or during operation, this will be indicated by the WARNING lamp,  
lamps inside the viewfinder and a warning tone.  
<Note>  
The WARNING lamp has the highest priority, followed by the tally lamp, and then the warning tone. When multiple errors occur  
simultaneously a higher priority indication will be triggered. The [WIRELESS RF], however, may not be indicated, depending on the  
menu setting.  
1. System Errors  
3. Battery Empty  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for battery remaining capacity  
start blinking.  
The error code lights up.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Lights up.  
Blinks once per second.  
The BATT LED lights up.  
Beeps continuously.  
The SYSTEM ERROR indication and the error  
code light up.  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
Warning tone  
Beeps continuously.  
7
Warning  
description  
The battery has run out.  
The operation stops.  
Warning  
description  
An error in the reference signal or the  
communication.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
The operation stops.  
Countermeasures Replace the battery.  
Please confirm [7-3-2 Error Codes] and consult  
your nearest service centre.  
Countermeasures  
2. Card removal error  
4. Write-protect  
Display window  
indication  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity  
start blinking.  
Error code E-30 appears.  
Continues to light up until an operation is  
performed.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
Blinks 4 times per second.  
The “TURN POWER OFF” indicator blinks.  
Continues to beep.  
WARNING lamp  
Continues to blink 4 times per second until an  
operation is performed.  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The WP indicator blinks.  
Warning tone  
Continues to beep until an operation is  
performed.  
The P2 card being accessed has been removed,  
resulting in an error in the internal memory of the  
camera-recorder.  
Warning  
description  
Warning  
description  
The inserted P2 cards are write-protected.  
Recording is disabled.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Cannot be performed.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Turn off the power to the camera-recorder. If  
Countermeasures there is an error in a clip on the removed P2 card,  
Countermeasures Disable the write-protect or replace the P2 card.  
repair the clip.  
89  
     
5. P2 Card Fully Recorded  
8. Battery Nearly Empty  
Display window  
indication  
All 7 bar indicators for remaining MEDIA capacity  
start blinking.  
Display window  
indication  
One of the bars in the battery remaining indicator  
starts blinking.  
Continues to light up until an operation is  
performed.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Blinks once per second.  
Blinks once per second.  
The BATT LED blinks.  
Beeps 4 times per second.  
WARNING lamp  
Continues to blink 4 times per second until an  
operation is performed.  
Tally lamp  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The END indicator blinks.  
Warning tone  
Continues to beep until an operation is  
performed.  
Warning  
description  
The battery is about to run out.  
Continues to operate.  
Warning  
description  
The P2 cards are recorded to maximum capacity.  
The recording stops.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Countermeasures Replace the battery as required.  
Delete the clips in the P2 card or insert a new P2  
card.  
Countermeasures  
6. Recording Error  
9. P2 Card Nearly Full  
Display window  
indication  
“00:00:00:11” appears in the time code display  
field.  
Display window  
indication  
One of the bars for remaining MEDIA capacity  
starts blinking.  
Blinks  
4
times per second while recording  
times per second while recording  
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
WARNING lamp  
continues.  
Blinks  
continues.  
4
Blinks once per second while recording  
continues.  
Tally lamp  
The REC WARNING indicator lights up.  
Even after recording is stopped, this display  
continues to light up until the next operation is  
performed.  
Viewfinder  
Warning tone  
The P2 card remaining capacity indicator blinks.  
Viewfinder  
Beeps once per second while recording  
continues.  
Warning  
description  
The total remaining capacity of all the P2 cards is  
two minutes or less.  
Beeps  
continues.  
4
times per second while recording  
Warning tone  
Warning  
description  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Recording signal processing error.  
Recording stops.  
Continues to operate.  
Replace the cards. If there is an empty card slot,  
insert a new card.  
Recording/  
playbackoperation  
Countermeasures  
Restart recording. Or, turn the power OFF and  
turn it ON again, before starting recording.  
Countermeasures  
7-3-2  
Error Codes  
7. Low Wireless Signal Reception  
The following error codes are displayed in the display window if  
an error occurs in the camera:  
Display window  
No display.  
indication  
Blinks 4 times per second. (During pause and  
recording)  
Blinks  
continues.  
WARNING lamp  
Tally lamp  
Code No.  
Description  
Video initialisation error  
E-11  
E-27  
E-30  
E-38  
E-3F  
E-6F  
4
times per second while recording  
Recording control error  
The WIRELESS RF indicator lights up while  
recording continues.  
P2 card removal error  
Viewfinder  
P2 streaming microcontroller error  
Microprocessor error in the camera control circuit.  
Reference signal error.  
Beeps  
4
times per second while recording  
Warning tone  
continues.  
Warning  
description  
This error indicates poor wireless audio reception  
conditions.  
Recording/  
Continues to operate without receiving the  
playbackoperation wireless microphone signal.  
Check the microphone power supply and the  
reception status of the wireless receiver.  
Countermeasures  
90  
   
Chapter 8 Menu Description Tables  
8-1  
Menu Configuration  
MENU  
USER MENU  
MAIN MENU  
SYSTEM SETTING  
PAINT  
SYSTEM MODE  
OPTION MODE  
REC FUNCTION  
OUTPUT SEL  
LCD MONITOR  
GENLOCK  
ROP  
MATRIX  
OPTION MENU  
COLOR CORRECTION  
LOW SETTING  
MID SETTING  
HIGH SETTING  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
SKIN TONE DTL  
KNEE/LEVEL  
GAMMA  
OPTION  
FLARE  
CAMERA SETTING  
VF  
VF DISPLAY  
VF MARKER  
USER BOX  
CAM OPERATION  
CAMERA ID  
8
SHUTTER SPEED  
SHUTTER SELECT  
USER SW  
VF INDICATOR1  
VF INDICATOR2  
MODE CHECK IND  
! LED  
SW MODE  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
USER SW GAIN  
IRIS  
BATTERY/P2CARD  
BATTERY SETTING1  
BATTERY SETTING2  
MIC/AUDIO 1  
MAIN OPERATION  
FILE  
Opening the Menus  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
SD CARD R/W SELECT  
LENS FILE  
USER MENU:  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed.  
MIC/AUDIO 2  
TC/UB  
UMID SET/INFO  
SCENE  
INITIALIZE  
MAIN MENU:  
MAINTENANCE  
SYSTEM CHECK  
LENS ADJ  
BLACK SHADING  
WHITE SHADING  
DIAGNOSTIC1  
DIAGNOSTIC2  
HOURS METER  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed for at least 3 seconds.  
USER MENU SELECT  
SYSTEM SETTING(USER)  
PAINT(USER)  
OPTION MENU:  
VF(USER)  
CAM OPE(USER)  
MAIN OPE(USER)  
FILE(USER)  
Displayed when the MENU button is  
pressed while pressing the LIGHT button.  
MAINTENANCE(USER)  
<Notes>  
z The following items can be set: 42 camera-related items (14 C 3 pages), 14 recording-related items (1 page).  
z The items highlighted in grey cannot be selected by <USER MENU SELECT>.  
z The underlined items can only be selected as one whole page (with all sub-items). Individual sub-items cannot be selected  
separately.  
About Menu Description Tables  
The following letters indicate whether the modified menu data is saved to  
or read out from the memory.  
Items/  
Data Saved e Range  
Adjustabl  
Remarks  
The  
–
indicates that the data cannot be saved or read.  
REC SIGNAL  
CAM  
Select video input signals.  
S =  
C =  
U =  
Can be saved and read as scene data file.  
Can be saved or read using CARD READ/WRITESD.  
Can be saved and read as user data.  
Please refer to [8-7-4 SCENE] and [8-7-5 INITIALISE].  
Can be read using READ FACTORY DATA.  
Please refer to [8-7-5 INITIALISE].  
Can be saved using ECU DATA SAVE.  
Please refer to [5-8 Connecting the AJ-EC3E Extension  
Controller].  
CAM Record the signal from the camera  
VIDEO: Record the signal from the GENLOCK  
ꢀ
VIDEO  
1394  
IN terminal  
1394: Record the signal from the 1394 input  
terminal. (When the optional unit is  
attached.)  
F =  
– C U F E  
E =  
This section shows the  
adjustable range of the  
set value, and available  
options for this item.  
About the settings available for this  
item.  
91  
   
8-2  
SYSTEM SETTING  
8-2-1  
SYSTEM MODE  
8-2-2  
OPTION MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Select video input signals.  
Remarks  
REC SIGNAL  
CAM  
VIDEO  
1394  
P. O F F G P S  
DATA  
HOLD  
CLEAR  
Select whether or not to hold the UMID GPS  
position information while the power is  
turned off, thereby keeping this information  
as status data holding the previous value  
until the power is turned on again, which  
enables a new measurement to start.  
HOLD: Hold and save the data.  
CAM Record the signal from the camera  
ꢀ
VIDEO: Record the signal from the  
GENLOCK IN terminal  
1394: Record the signal from the 1394  
input terminal (when the optional unit  
is attached. *To be supported in the  
near future.)  
CLEAR  
ꢀ
Clear the data when the power is  
turned off, and save zero (No-Info)  
from the next power-on until a new  
measurement is completed.  
<Notes>  
z After the power has been turned OFF, this  
setting defaults to CAM when the power is  
turned ON again.  
z With VIDEO selected, to synchronise this  
camera-recorder to the video signal (VBS)  
that is input to the GENLOCK IN terminal,  
the GENLOCK item in [8-2-6 GENLOCK]  
must be set to EXT.  
– C U F –  
SDI METADATA ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to output metadata  
(UMID) to the SDI (when the optional AJ-  
YA902AG is attached).  
– C U F –  
SDI EDH  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to add an error  
detection flag to the SDI output (when the  
optional AJ-YA902AG is attached).  
– C U F E  
CAMERA  
MODE  
50I  
25P  
Switch the operating mode of the camera.  
– C U F –  
50i:  
Camera operates in 50i mode.  
SAVE SW (AUD ON  
OUT)  
Select whether or not to forcibly disable the  
audio output when the SAVE ON/OFF  
switch is set to [ON].  
ON: Disable audio output.  
OFF: Enable audio output.  
25P: Camera operates in 25P mode.  
S C U F E  
OFF  
V.RES (25P)  
INTRLCE  
PROG.  
Set the vertical resolution when the 25P  
mode is selected.  
INTRLCE: Lines are mixed. Natural images  
can be obtained.  
PROG. : Lines are not mixed. Complete  
progressive images can be  
– C U F –  
SAVE SW (LCD) ON  
Select whether or not to automatically turn  
off the LCD monitor when the SAVE ON/  
OFF switch is set to [ON].  
ON: Turn off LCD monitor.  
OFF: Do not turn off LCD monitor.  
OFF  
obtained when images are edited  
after shooting.  
<Note>  
– C U F –  
When PROG. is selected, images are  
recorded as progressive segmented frame  
images, which enables complete  
progressive editing. However, adding  
Vertical Detail (V.DTL) produces unnatural  
images. Therefore, we recommend using  
the camera with V.DTL set to 0. (Sufficient  
vertical response is maintained in the  
images after the progressive editing even  
when V.DTL is set to 0.)  
SAVE SW (SDI) ON  
Select whether or not to automatically  
disable the SDI output when the SAVE ON/  
OFF switch is set to [ON].  
ON: Disable SDI output.  
OFF: Enable SDI output.  
OFF  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
S C U F E  
ASPECT  
16:9  
4:3  
Select the aspect ratio for recording.  
16:9: Record in <16:9> aspect ratio.  
4:3: Record in <4:3> aspect ratio.  
– C U F E  
REC MODE  
50M  
25M  
DV  
Select the recording mode.  
50M: Record in DVCPRO50 format.  
25M: Record in DVCPRO format.  
DV:  
Record in DV format.  
– C U F E  
REC TALLY  
RED  
GREEN  
CHAR  
Select the method of displaying the  
recording status of the camera-recorder  
when controlling the equipment connected  
to 1394 (scheduled to be supported soon).  
The recording status of the connected  
equipment is displayed by the red tally lamp  
on the camera-recorder.  
RED: The red tally lamp lights up.  
GREEN:The green tally lamp lights up.  
CHAR: The VF displays [REC] in characters.  
– C U F E  
ACCESS LED  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable illumination  
of the P2 card access LEDs.  
ON: Enable the P2 card access LEDs to  
light up for card status indications.  
OFF: LEDs remain off.  
– C U F E  
92  
     
8-2-3  
REC FUNCTION  
8-2-4  
OUTPUT SEL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Set PRE RECORDING.  
Remarks  
PRE REC TIME 0SEC  
VIDEO OUT  
SEL  
VBS  
VF  
Y
Select the output signal on the VIDEO OUT  
terminal.  
VBS: Output a regular composite signal.  
:
0-15SEC:  
15SEC  
Set the length of time that can be  
retrospectively recorded before the  
REC START button is pressed.  
VF:  
Output a VF Y signal. The status  
display is also superimposed.  
Output a component Y signal.  
SDI  
<Note>  
Y:  
The maximum selectable range is 8 seconds  
when the REC MODE in the <SYSTEM  
MODE> screen is set to 50M (DVCPRO50).  
SDI: Output an SDI signal. Only  
selectable when the optional AJ-  
YA902AG extension board is  
attached.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
LOOP REC  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable LOOP REC.  
This setting can be used with PRE  
RECORDING features.  
OUTPUT CHAR TC  
STATUS  
MENU  
ONLY  
Set the character contents superimposed  
onto the output signals for the VIDEO OUT  
terminal (Analog or SDI) and MON OUT  
terminal.  
ON:  
Enable LOOP REC.  
OFF: Disable LOOP REC.  
<Note>  
After the power is turned off, this item will  
default to OFF the next time the power is  
turned on.  
TC:  
Display the time code. (Displays the  
menu when menu characters are  
superimposed.)  
<Note>  
– – – F –  
The TC display position moves up and down  
depending on the camera ID position.  
STATUS:  
VOICE MEMO ON  
RESERV  
Set the available memory space for voice  
memos in P2 cards.  
OFF  
ON: Reserve a voice memo area of 10  
minutes or longer separately from the  
video recording capacity. The voice  
memo area can be used even when  
FULL is displayed for the recording  
capacity of the P2 card.  
OFF: Do not reserve any voice memo  
space.  
<Note>  
Even when this item is set to OFF, and FULL  
is displayed for the P2 card’s recording  
capacity, it may be possible to record voice  
memos depending on the status of the P2  
card.  
Display the same characters  
superimposed on the VF signal.  
(Displays the menu when menu  
characters are superimposed.)  
MENU ONLY:  
8
Displays only when the menu  
characters are superimposed. No  
display appears when other  
characters are superimposed.  
– C U F –  
MONITOR OUT ON  
CHAR  
Select whether or not to superimpose  
characters on the MON OUT terminal signal  
independently of the camera’s VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch. (The character  
content is the same as the video output  
signal.)  
OFF  
– C U F –  
REC START  
ALL  
Select operating modes that allow recording  
to start.  
ALL: Allow recording to start during stop,  
recording pause, and playback.  
NORMAL:  
NORMAL  
ON: Enable superimpose.  
OFF: Disable superimpose.  
– C U F –  
LCD MON  
CHAR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to superimpose  
characters on the LCD monitor. (The  
character content is the same as the video  
output signal.)  
Allow recording to start during stop  
and recording pause.  
– C U F –  
ON: Enable superimpose.  
(Not interlocked with the VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch.)  
OFF: Disable superimpose.  
(Not interlocked with the VIDEO OUT  
CHARACTER switch.)  
– C U F –  
VF MODE  
EE/PB  
EE  
Select the image to display in the viewfinder.  
EE/PB: Display the playback image in the  
playback mode.  
EE:  
Always display the camera image.  
– C U F –  
THUMBNAIL  
OUT  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to output clip  
thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor to  
the video output and monitor output signals.  
ON:  
Enable output.  
OFF: Disable output.  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
93  
     
8-3  
PAINT  
8-2-5  
LCD MONITOR  
8-3-1  
ROP  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
BRIGHTNESS –7  
Adjust the LCD monitor brightness.  
Adjust the LCD monitor chroma level.  
Adjust the LCD monitor contrast.  
MASTER PED –200  
Set the master pedestal level.  
:
:
+0  
:
+008  
:
– C U F – +7  
S C U F E +200  
COLOR LEVEL –7  
MASTER DTL –31  
Set the H Detail and V Detail levels.  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
Set the KNEE POINT position in 0.5% steps.  
Set the KNEE slope.  
:
:
+0  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E  
– C U F – +7  
+31  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
CONTRAST  
–7  
:
:
0.45  
:
+0  
:
S C U F E 0.75  
– C U F – +7  
KNEE POINT  
70.0%  
:
BACKLIGHT  
HIGH  
Select whether or not to set the LCD monitor  
brightness to always high.  
NORMAL  
85 0%  
:
S C U F E 107.0%  
HIGH:  
NORMAL  
Set to always high.  
The brightness changes  
according to the BRIGHTNESS  
setting.  
:
KNEE SLOPE  
0
:
– C U F –  
50  
SELF SHOOT  
NORMAL  
MIRROR  
Select whether or not to change the LCD  
monitor to mirror image.  
:
S C U F E  
99  
NORMAL  
:
Do not change to mirror image.  
Change to mirror image.  
R GAIN  
–200  
:
Set the Rch gain.  
MIRROR  
:
– C U F –  
+000  
:
ASPECT CONV. LT.BOX  
SQUEEZE  
Select a screen ratio for images displayed  
on the LCD monitor.  
S C U F E +200  
LT.BOX  
:
Display images in the letter box  
size.  
G GAIN  
–200  
:
Set the Gch gain.  
SQEEZE: Display images in the squeeze size.  
<Note>  
This item is enabled only when ASPECT  
described in “8-2-1 SYSTEM MODE” is set  
to16:9.  
+000  
:
S C U F E +200  
B GAIN  
–200  
:
Set the Bch gain.  
– C U F –  
+000  
:
S C U F E +200  
8-2-6  
GENLOCK  
R PEDESTAL  
–100  
Set the Rch pedestal level.  
Set the Gch pedestal level.  
Set the Bch pedestal level.  
:
+000  
:
Items/  
Data Saved e Range  
Adjustabl  
Remarks  
S C U F E +100  
G PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
+000  
:
GENLOCK  
INT  
EXT  
Switch the camera synchronising signal.  
INT: Synchronise with the internal  
reference signal regardless of the  
reference signal input to the  
S C U F E +100  
GENLOCK IN terminal.  
B PEDESTAL  
–100  
:
EXT: Synchronise with the reference signal  
input to the GENLOCK IN terminal.  
+000  
:
– C U F E  
S C U F E +100  
H PHASE  
COARSE  
–50  
Perform coarse phase adjustment for  
horizontal hold when configuring a system.  
:
+00  
:
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
– – – – – +50  
H PHASE FINE –160  
Perform fine phase adjustment for horizontal  
hold when configuring a system.  
<Note>  
This adjustment simultaneously shifts the SC  
phase.  
:
+000  
:
+160  
– – – – –  
SC PHASE  
COARSE  
0
1
:
Perform coarse SC PHASE adjustment when  
GENLOCK is set.  
3
– – – – –  
SC PHASE  
FINE  
–75  
:
+00  
:
Perform fine SC PHASE adjustment when  
GENLOCK is set.  
<Note>  
When adjusting GENLOCK, please adjust H  
PHASE first, and then adjust SC PHASE.  
+75  
– – – – –  
94  
       
8-3-2  
MATRIX  
8-3-3  
COLOR CORRECTION  
Items/  
Data Saved e Range  
Adjustabl  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
A
B
Select the colour correction table. 2 types of  
tables can be stored: type A and type B.  
R
–63  
Perform red colour correction (saturation  
and hue).  
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
+00  
:
S C U F E  
MATRIX R-G  
S C U F E +63  
–31  
:
+30  
:
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
Adjust the tint.  
R-Mg  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform colour correction (saturation and  
hue) between red and magenta.  
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +63  
MATRIX R-B  
–31  
:
+05  
:
Mg  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform magenta colour correction  
(saturation and hue).  
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +63  
MATRIX G-R  
–31  
:
+16  
:
Mg-B  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform colour correction (saturation and  
hue) between magenta and blue.  
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +63  
MATRIX G-B  
–31  
:
+19  
:
B
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform blue colour correction (saturation  
and hue).  
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E  
+63  
MATRIX B-R  
–31  
:
+16  
:
8
B-Cy  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform colour correction (saturation and  
hue) between blue and cyan.  
S C U F E  
+31  
S C U F E +63  
MATRIX B-G  
–31  
:
+05  
:
Cy  
–63  
:
+00  
:
Perform cyan colour correction (saturation  
and hue).  
(SAT/PHASE)  
S C U F E  
+31  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
B
Select the colour correction table to be  
applied to the selected GAIN switch (L/M/H).  
S C U F E +63  
Cy-G  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform colour correction (saturation and  
hue) between cyan and green.  
:
S C U F E  
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
<Note>  
G
–63  
Perform green colour correction (saturation,  
hue).  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU  
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items  
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
G-Yl  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform colour correction (saturation, hue)  
between green and yellow.  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
Yl  
–63  
Perform yellow colour correction (saturation,  
hue).  
:
(SAT/PHASE)  
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
Yl-R  
(SAT/PHASE)  
–63  
Perform colour correction (saturation, hue)  
between yellow and red.  
:
+00  
:
S C U F E +63  
„
COLOR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable colour  
correction for the selected GAIN switch (L/  
M/H).  
CORRECT  
ON:  
Enable correction.  
OFF: Disable correction.  
S C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
95  
   
8-3-4  
LOW SETTING  
8-3-5  
MID SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
„
GAIN  
MASTER  
–3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
„
GAIN  
MASTER  
–3dB  
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
:
:
0dB  
:
9dB  
:
S C U F E 30dB  
S C U F E 30dB  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
Set H.DTL LEVEL.  
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
Set H.DTL LEVEL.  
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
:
:
17  
:
14  
:
S C U F E 63  
S C U F E 63  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
24  
:
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
20  
:
S C U F E 31  
S C U F E 31  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
DTL CORING  
00  
:
02  
:
03  
:
S C U F E 15  
S C U F E 15  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which H.DTL  
is added. The greater the value, the higher  
the frequency (the narrower the DTL).  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which H.DTL  
is added. The greater the value, the higher  
the frequency (the narrower the DTL).  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
31  
31  
LEVEL  
DEPEND.  
0
1
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
LEVEL  
DEPEND.)  
0
1
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is set to  
STD, each setting value represents  
brightness levels, as follows: 0 = about 0%,  
1 = about 4%, 2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is set to  
STD, each setting value represents  
brightness levels, as follows: 0 = about 0%,  
1 = about 4%, 2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
5
5
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
:
:
0.45  
:
0.45  
:
S C U F E 0.75  
S C U F E 0.75  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
:
:
OFF  
:
OFF  
:
S C U F E +3  
S C U F E +3  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
Select the colour correction table.  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
Select the colour correction table.  
B
B
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
„
COLOR  
ON  
Set the colour correction to ON or OFF.  
„
COLOR  
ON  
Set the colour correction to ON or OFF.  
CORRECT  
OFF  
CORRECT  
OFF  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
<Note>  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU  
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items  
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
96  
   
8-3-6  
HIGH SETTING  
8-3-7  
ADDITIONAL DTL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
Set KNEE APE LEVEL.  
„
MASTER  
–3dB  
:
18dB  
:
Select the master gain from –3, 0, 3, 6, 9,  
12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, or 30dB.  
KNEE APE LVL OFF  
1
GAIN  
2
:
5
S C U F E 30dB  
S C U F E  
H.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
12  
:
Set H.DTL.  
CHROMA DTL OFF  
Set the chroma detail.  
Detects the chroma edge and superimposes  
it on Y to enhance H.DTL. A greater value  
increases the correction.  
0
:
5
S C U F E 63  
S C U F E  
V.DTL LEVEL  
00  
:
17  
:
Set V.DTL LEVEL.  
Set DTL CORING.  
DTL GAIN(+)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
Adjust the detail level toward + (upwards).  
S C U F E 31  
S C U F E  
+31  
DTL CORING  
00  
:
08  
:
DTL GAIN(–)  
–31  
:
+00  
:
Adjust the detail level toward the –  
(downwards).  
S C U F E 15  
S C U F E  
+31  
H.DTL FREQ.  
00  
:
20  
:
Set a frequency (DTL width) at which H.DTL  
is added. The greater the value, the higher  
the frequency (the narrower the DTL).  
DTL CLIP  
00  
:
63  
Adjust the detail signal clip towards the +  
direction.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
31  
DTL SOURCE (R+G)/2  
(G+B)/2  
Set the signal source for detail signal  
components.  
8
LEVEL  
DEPEND.)  
0
:
3
:
Set LEVEL DEPEND.  
No DTL is added to the portion whose  
brightness is the setting value or less.  
When the GAMMA MODE SEL item is set to  
STD, each setting value represents  
brightness levels, as follows: 0 = about 0%,  
1 = about 4%, 2 = about 8%, 3 = about 12%,  
4 = about 16%, 5 = about 20%.  
2G+R+B /4  
(3G+R)/4  
R
G
5
S C U F E  
H.DTL LINE MIX 1H  
2H  
Set the scan line to generate the H.DTL  
signal.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
:
0.55  
:
Set MASTER GAMMA in 0.01 steps.  
„
CORNER DTL ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for CORNER DTL mode,  
which enhances the resolution around the  
screen perimeter.  
S C U F E  
S C U F E 0.75  
BLACK  
STRETCH  
–3  
Set the gamma curb for dark spots.  
<Note>  
:
OFF  
:
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU  
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items  
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
S C U F E +3  
„
TABLE  
MATRIX  
OFF  
A
Select the colour correction table.  
B
S C U F E  
„
COLOR  
ON  
Set the colour correction to ON or OFF.  
CORRECT  
OFF  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
S C U F E  
97  
   
8-3-8  
SKIN TONE DTL  
8-3-9  
KNEE/LEVEL  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
Set the master pedestal.  
„
SKIN TONE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the skin tone DTL to ON or OFF.  
MASTER PED –200  
:
DTL  
+020  
:
S C U F E  
S C U F E +200  
„
ZEBRA  
SKIN TONE  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for ZEBRA within the  
SKIN TONE range.  
„
MANUAL  
ON  
Set the mode when the AUTO KNEE switch  
is OFF. The KNEE POINT/SLOPE set value  
is enabled when this setting is ON.  
KNEE  
OFF  
S C U F E  
S C U F E  
KNEE POINT  
SKIN DTL  
CORING  
0
:
5
:
Adjust the effect of SKIN TONE DTC  
CORING.  
70.0%  
:
85.0%  
:
Set the KNEE POINT position in 0.5% steps.  
S C U F E  
7
S C U F E 107.0%  
SKIN TONE  
GET  
Used when obtaining the target hue for  
SKIN TONE DTL. Align the centre marker  
and the target object with each other.  
KNEE SLOPE 00  
Set the KNEE SLOPE.  
0 setting is equal to KNEE OFF.  
<Note>  
The adjustable range when using the AJ-  
EC3E is from 00 to 98.  
:
– – – – –  
50  
:
Y MAX  
000  
:
190  
:
Set the maximum value of the brightness  
signal to which SKIN TONE effect is  
enabled.  
99 (98)  
S C U F E  
„
WHITE CLIP ON  
Set the WHITE CLIP feature to ON or OFF.  
The WHITE CLIP LVL set value is enabled  
when this setting is ON.  
S C U F E  
255  
OFF  
Y MIN  
000  
:
010  
:
Set the minimum value of the brightness  
signal to which the SKIN TONE effect is  
enabled.  
S C U F E  
WHITE CLIP  
LVL  
90%  
Set WHITE CLIP LEVEL.  
:
S C U F E  
255  
105%  
:
I CENTER  
000  
:
022  
:
Set the centre position on the I axis (the  
area where SKIN TONE is enabled).  
S C U F E 109%  
A.KNEE POINT 80%  
Set the AUTO KNEE POINT position in  
0.5% steps. This setting is enabled when the  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector switch is set  
to CAM.AUTO KNEE ON.  
:
S C U F E 255  
85%  
:
I WIDTH  
000  
:
010  
:
Set the area width where SKIN TONE is  
enabled along the I axis above and below  
the I CENTER.  
S C U F E 107%  
A.KNEE LVL  
100  
:
Set the AUTO KNEE LEVEL.  
S C U F E 255  
105  
:
Q WIDTH  
000  
:
005  
:
Set the area width where SKIN TONE is  
enabled along the Q axis above and below  
the I CENTER.  
S C U F E 109  
A.KNEE  
RESPONSE  
1
:
4
Set the AUTO KNEE response speed.  
The smaller the setting value, the faster the  
response speed.  
S C U F E 255  
S C U F E  
Q PHASE  
–128  
:
+000  
:
Set the phase in the area where SKIN TONE  
is enabled based on the Q axis.  
<Note>  
S C U F E +127  
The items indicated by „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU  
SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT> screen. The items  
without „ are the setting items for PAINT MENU LEVEL R/W.  
Please refer to [8-7-2 SD CARD R/W SELECT] for more  
information.  
Y
R-Y  
Q-WIDTH  
I-CENTER  
I-WIDTH  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
Y-MAX  
+ direction  
Q-PHASE  
B-Y  
– direction  
Y-MIN  
0
= SKIN TONE AREA  
98  
   
8-3-10 GAMMA  
8-3-12 „CAMERA SETTING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
MASTER  
GAMMA  
0.35  
Set the master gamma in 0.01% steps.  
DETAIL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the DTL (H, V) to ON or OFF.  
:
0.45  
:
S C U F E  
S C U F E 0.75  
2D LPF  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the two-dimensional  
LPF that reduces cross-colour.  
R GAMMA  
–15  
:
Set the Rch gamma.  
Set the Bch gamma.  
S C U F E  
+00  
:
HIGH COLOR ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the HIGH COLOR  
mode, which enhances the colour dynamic  
range.  
S C U F E +15  
B GAMMA  
–15  
:
S C U F E  
GAMMA  
ON  
OFF  
Set the gamma circuit to ON or OFF.  
Switch the test signal ON or OFF.  
Set the flare correction to ON or OFF.  
+00  
:
S C U F E +15  
S C U F E  
GAMMA MODE STD  
Select the gamma.  
TEST SAW  
ON  
OFF  
STD: Standard gamma feature.  
This video gamma feature can  
effectively reproduce gradations by  
reducing whiteouts and blackouts  
when shooting an object with  
partially highlighted areas. This  
gamma is especially effective in the  
AUTO KNEE mode.  
SEL  
NEWS  
FILM LIKE1  
FILM LIKE2  
S C U F E  
FLARE  
ON  
OFF  
S C U F E  
H-F COMPE.  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the H-F COMPE  
mode, which enhances the DTL in the high-  
frequency range.  
8
FILM LIKE1:  
Cinema gamma feature for video.  
This gamma is set with scene file 4  
as the factory setting.  
S C U F E  
FILM LIKE2:  
Cinema gamma feature for video.  
This gamma feature can reproduce  
gradations in highlighted areas better  
than FILM LIKE1 gamma.  
<Notes>  
ZEBRA Pattern Display  
ZEBRA 2  
Video Level  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
z Selecting NEWS gamma  
disables  
109%  
settings under the items KNEE SLOPE,  
KNEE POINT, and A.KNEE POINT  
outlined in [8-3-9 KNEE/LEVEL]. These  
settings are also disabled when NEWS  
gamma is selected with the USER switch.  
z When FILELIKE1 or FILELIKE2 is  
selected, little change occurs and  
a
certain curve is maintained when the  
setting value for the KNEE SLOPE item in  
[8-3-9 KNEE/LEVEL] is 00 to 50.  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
S C U F E  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
8-3-11 FLARE  
Items/  
Data Saved e Range  
Adjustabl  
Remarks  
0%  
R FLARE  
000  
:
Set the R FLARE.  
100  
<Note>  
S C U F E  
All items in CAMERA SETTING are setting targets of the item  
PAINT MENU SW(„) R/W in the <SD CARD R/W SELECT>  
screen.  
G FLARE  
000  
:
100  
Set the G FLARE.  
Set the B FLARE.  
S C U F E  
B GAMMA  
000  
:
100  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
S C U F E  
99  
     
8-4  
VF  
8-4-1  
VF DISPLAY  
8-4-2  
VF MARKER  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
DISP  
CONDITION  
NORMAL  
HOLD  
NORMAL: Display status constantly.  
HOLD: Display status only when the  
MODE CHECK switch is pressed.  
TABLE  
A
B
Select the VF MARKER setting table.  
First, select table A or B, then set the items  
below for each table.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
DISP MODE  
1
2
3
Set the DISP MODE.  
CENTER MARK OFF  
Switch the centre mark.  
OFF: Do not display centre mark.  
Switch the camera’s Warning/Message  
indication. Please refer to [4-7-4 Display  
Modes and Setting Changes/adjustment  
Result Messages] for more information.  
1
2
3
4
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
+ (large)  
Hollow (large)  
+ (small)  
– C U F E  
Hollow (small)  
– C U F E  
VF OUT  
Y
Select the VF output.  
Y:  
Brightness signal  
NAM  
R
G
SAFETY ZONE OFF  
Select the frame type for the safety zone.  
OFF: Do not display frame.  
NAM: Output signal with the highest level  
1
2
among R, G, and B signals.  
1:  
2:  
Box  
Corner frame  
R:  
G:  
B:  
Rch signal  
Gch signal  
Bch signal  
B
– C U F E  
SAFETY AREA 80%  
Set the position of the safety zone.  
– C U F E  
:
90%  
VF DTL  
0
:
3
:
Select the VF DTL.  
:
Additionally enhance the DTL for the VF  
signal. 0 setting is the same DTL as the  
primary scan lines.  
– C U F E  
100%  
FRAME SIG  
4:3  
Set the frame marker.  
Only enabled when REC MODE is set to  
16:9.  
– C U F E  
5
13:9  
14:9  
VISTA  
ZEBRA1  
DETECT  
0%  
:
70%  
:
Set the ZEBRA1 detection level (IRE value).  
Set the ZEBRA2 detection level (IRE value).  
Set the ZEBRA2 to ON, OFF, or SPOT.  
The VISTA ratio is 16:8.65.  
– C U F E  
FRAME MARK ON  
Set the frame marker to ON or OFF.  
– C U F E 109%  
OFF  
– C U F E  
ZEBRA2  
DETECT  
0%  
:
85%  
:
FRAME LVL  
0
:
15  
Set the level outside the frame marker.  
0:  
15:  
Equivalent to signal OFF.  
Same brightness as centre area.  
This setting, however, is disabled if  
the FRAME SIG is set to VISTA.  
– C U F E 109%  
ZEBRA2  
ON  
SPOT  
OFF  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
LOW LIGHT LVL OFF  
Set the camera incoming light volume at  
which to display LOW LIGNT.  
8-4-3  
USER BOX  
10%  
15%  
20%  
25%  
30%  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
USER BOX  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the USER  
BOX.  
35%  
– C U F E  
ECU MENU  
DISP.  
ON  
OFF  
Set the menu display on the VF to ON or  
OFF when the ECU is connected.  
– C U F E  
USER BOX  
WIDTH  
1
Set the width of the USER BOX.  
– C U F E  
:
50M  
INDICATOR  
ON  
OFF  
Set the 50M recording indication to ON or  
OFF.  
13  
:
100  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
USER BOX  
HEIGHT  
1
:
13  
:
Set the height of the USER BOX.  
MARKER/CHAR 50%  
LVL  
Adjust the brightness of markers and  
characters displayed on the VF.  
60%  
70%  
80%  
90%  
100%  
– C U F E 144  
USER BOX H  
POS  
–50  
:
+00  
:
Set the horizontal position of the USER  
BOX.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E +50  
USER BOX V  
POS  
–144  
Set the vertical position of the USER BOX.  
:
+000  
:
– C U F E +144  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
100  
         
8-4-4  
VF INDICATOR1  
8-4-5  
VF INDICATOR2  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the extender indication to ON or OFF.  
P2CARD  
REMAIN  
TOTAL  
ONE-CARD  
OFF  
Select the indication mode for the P2 card’s  
remaining capacity.  
TOTAL: Display the total remaining capacity  
of all P2 cards in slots.  
ONE-CARD:  
Display the remaining capacity of the  
P2 card currently used for recording.  
OFF: Disable the remaining capacity  
indication.  
– C U F E  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the shutter speed indication to ON or  
OFF.  
– C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
Set the filter No. indication to ON or OFF.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
BATTERY  
ON  
OFF  
Set the battery voltage indication to ON or  
OFF.  
WHITE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the AWB PRE/A/B indication to ON or  
OFF.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
AUDIO LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the audio lever meter indication to ON or  
OFF.  
GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
Set to ON or OFF the indications for current  
gain setting, S.GAIN, and DS.GAIN.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
TC  
TCG  
TCR  
TCG/TCR  
OFF  
Select the time code to display.  
TCG: Display the time code generator  
value in E-E mode.  
TCR: Display the time code reader value in  
V-V mode.  
TCG/TCR:  
IRIS  
OFF  
IRIS  
S+IRIS  
S
OFF: Disable indications of both the super  
iris ON status and the iris value.  
IRIS: Enable only the iris value indication.  
S+IRIS: Enables indications of the super iris  
ON status and the iris value.  
8
Display the time code generator  
value in E-E mode, and the time  
code reader value in V-V mode.  
OFF: Disable the time code display.  
S:  
Enable indication of the super iris ON  
status.  
(The iris value indication and the iris  
override indication/non indication are  
interlocked.)  
Select when to enable the ID mix during  
recording.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
SYSTEM INFO ALWAYS  
Select the method of displaying system  
information and warnings.  
ALWAYS:  
Always display warnings.  
NORMAL:  
Display warnings for 3 seconds only  
when problems occur.  
OFF: Display no warnings other than  
CAMERA ID  
BAR  
NORMAL  
OFF  
CAM  
ALWAYS  
OFF  
BAR:  
Enable when recording colour  
bars.  
Enable when recording camera  
image.  
CAM:  
ALWAYS: Enable always.  
OFF: Disable ID mix.  
– C U F E  
“TURN POWER OFF”.  
– C U F E  
SAVE LED  
P2CARD  
SAVE  
Set the SAVE lamp function.  
P2CARD:  
ID POSITION  
UPPER R  
UPPER L  
LOWER R  
LOWER L  
Set the camera ID recording position.  
UPPER R: Upper right.  
The lamp blinks in synch with the  
warning message when the P2  
card’s remaining recording capacity  
is getting low.  
UPPER L  
:
Upper left.  
LOWER R: Lower right.  
LOWER L: Lower left.  
– C U F E  
SAVE: The lamp lights up when the SAVE  
ON/OFF switch is set to ON and the  
output system assigned in [8-2-2  
OPTION MODE] is in the save mode.  
DATE/TIME  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to simultaneously mix  
the year/month/date and hour/minute/  
second when recording the camera ID.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
ZOOM LVL  
ON  
OFF  
Set the zoom position indication to ON or  
OFF.  
DV  
ON  
OFF  
DV Select whether or not to enable DV  
indication when the format is set to DV.  
ON: Enable DV indication.  
– C U F E  
COLOR TEMP ON  
OFF  
Set the colour temperature indication to ON  
or OFF.  
OFF: Disable DV indication.  
– C U F E  
VOICEMEMO  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the  
indication during voice memo recording.  
ON: Enable DV indication.  
V
– C U F E  
CAMERA  
MODE  
ON  
OFF  
Set the camera operation mode indication to  
ON or OFF.  
OFF: Disable DV indication.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
101  
   
8-4-6  
MODE CHECK IND  
8-4-7  
!LED  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
STATUS  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the status  
indication during MODE CHECK.  
GAIN(0dB)  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
GAIN is set to other than 0 dB.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
!LED  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the cause  
indication screen when the ! LED turns on  
during MODE CHECK  
GAIN (–3dB)  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
GAIN is set to other than –3 dB.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
FUNCTION  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the  
FUNCTION indication screen during MODE  
CHECK.  
DS.GAIN  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
DS.GAIN (storage gain) is ON.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
AUDIO  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the AUDIO  
indication screen during MODE CHECK.  
SHUTTER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when the  
shutter is set to ON.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
P.ON IND  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the status  
indication screen after the power is turned  
ON.  
WHITE  
PRESET  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
EXTENDER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when the  
lens is in EXTENDER mode.  
– C U F E  
BLACK STR  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
BLACK STRETCH is used.  
– C U F E  
MATRIX  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
MATRIX is set to ON.  
– C U F E  
COLOR  
CORRECTION OFF  
ON  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
COLOR CORRECTION is set to ON.  
– C U F E  
FILTER  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate the lamp  
when filter1 (3200K) is not 3200K.  
– C U F E  
SUPER V  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
SUPER V is set to ON.  
– C U F E  
50M/25M/DV  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate according  
to the recording mode.  
OFF: Does not illuminate in any recording  
mode.  
W/O 50M  
W/O 25M  
W/O DV  
W/O 50M:  
Illuminate except in DVCPRO50  
mode.  
W/O 25M:  
llluminate except in DVCPRO mode.  
W/O DV:  
Illuminate except in DV mode.  
– C U F E  
ATW  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate when  
auto-tracking white balance is allocated to  
the WHITE BAL switch B.  
– C U F E  
D.ZOOM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to illuminate during  
digital zoom operation.  
– C U F E  
<Note>  
If both GAIN (0 dB) and GAIN (–3 dB) are set to ON, the LED  
illuminates except when GAIN is adjusted to 0 dB and –3 dB.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
102  
     
8-5  
CAM OPERATION  
8-5-1  
CAMERA ID  
8-5-3  
SHUTTER SELECT  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
ID1  
Setting 1 for the CAMERA ID recorded on  
colour bars. Up to 10 characters are allowed  
for this setting.  
SUPER V  
MODE  
FRM1  
FRM2  
Select the SUPER V switching mode.  
FRM1: Normal mode.  
FRM2: After-image reduction mode.  
<Note>  
The SUPER V mode increases vertical  
resolution by directly outputting the photo-  
diode vertical signal from the CCD. FRM1  
sets the accumulation level to 1/25th  
second. FRM sets the level to 1/50th  
second, reducing sensitivity by half.  
– C U F –  
ID2  
Setting 2 for the CAMERA ID recorded on  
colour bars. Up to 10 characters are allowed  
for this setting.  
– C U F –  
ID3  
Setting 3 for the CAMERA ID recorded on  
colour bars. Up to 10 characters are allowed  
for this setting.  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
POSITION1  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION1.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
<Note>  
This setting is canceled when READ FACTORY DATA is  
selected.  
– C U F E  
POSITION2  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION2.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
8-5-2  
SHUTTER SPEED  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
8
– C U F E  
SYNCHRO  
SCAN  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate SYNCHRO SCAN as a shutter  
speed selectable by the shutter switch.  
POSITION3  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION3.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
– C U F E  
SUPER V  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate SUPER V as a shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
POSITION4  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION4.  
POSITION1  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by POSITION  
SELECT in the <SHUTTER SELECT>  
screen as the shutter speed selectable by  
the shutter switch.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
– C U F E  
POSITION2  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION2 SELECT in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
POSITION5  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION5.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
– C U F E  
POSITION3  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION3 SELECT in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
POSITION6  
SEL  
1/60  
Select the shutter speed to be allocated to  
POSITION6.  
POSITION4  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION4 SELECT in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
1/120  
1/250  
1/500  
1/1000  
1/2000  
– C U F E  
POSITION5  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION5 SELECT in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
– C U F E  
POSITION6  
ON  
OFF  
Allocate the shutter speed set by  
POSITION6 SELECT in the <SHUTTER  
SELECT> screen as the shutter speed  
selectable by the shutter switch.  
– C U F E  
103  
       
8-5-4  
USER SW  
8-5-5  
SW MODE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
USER MAIN SW INH  
Allocate the USER MAIN button.  
Allocate the USER1 button.  
Allocate the USER2 button.  
RET SW  
REC  
CHECK  
CAM RET  
Select the RET switch function.  
REC CHECK:  
Perform REC REVIEW.  
CAM RET:  
S.GAIN  
DS.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
D.ZOOM  
ATW  
Perform return signal output.  
– C U F E  
S.BLK LVL  
OFF  
–10  
–20  
–30  
Set the super black level.  
– C U F E  
Y GET  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
AUTO KNEE  
SW  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to use the AUTO  
KNEE switch.  
S C U F E  
SHD,ABB SW  
CTL  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the  
automatic black shading adjustment if the  
ABB switch has been pressed for 5 seconds  
or more.  
– C U F E  
USER1 SW  
INH  
– C U F E  
S.GAIN  
DS.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
D.ZOOM  
ATW  
COLOR BARS SMPTE  
Select the colour bars to use.  
SMPTE:  
Use the SMPTE colour bars.  
FULL  
BARS  
SPLIT  
ARIB  
FULL BARS: Use full colour bars.  
SPLIT:  
ARIB:  
Use SPLIT colour bars.  
Use ARIB multi-format colour  
bars.  
– C U F E  
S.GAIN OFF  
L/M/H  
S.GAIN  
Select when the SUPER GAIN mode is  
disabled.  
L/M/H: Disabled when the gain selector  
switch is operated.  
S.GAIN:Disabled only with the S.GAIN switch  
(USER button).  
Y GET  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
– C U F E  
DS.GAIN OFF L/M/H  
DS.GAIN  
Select when the DIGITAL SUPER GAIN  
mode (stored gain) is disabled.  
– C U F E  
USER2 SW  
INH  
L/M/H  
:
Disabled when the gain selector  
switch is operated.  
S.GAIN  
DS.GAIN  
S.IRIS  
I.OVR  
S.BLK  
B.STR  
D.ZOOM  
ATW  
DS.GAIN: Disabled only with the DS.GAIN  
switch (USER button).  
– C U F E  
ECU DATA  
SAVE  
ON  
OFF  
ON: Store the values set and adjusted  
with the ECU when the ECU is  
disconnected from the camera-  
recorder.  
OFF: Does not store camera-related set  
Y GET  
values.  
– C U F –  
NEWS-G.  
AUDIO CH1  
AUDIO CH2  
REC SW  
RET SW  
SLOT SEL  
ECU REC CHK R.REVIEW  
SW  
Select the camera-recorder operation to be  
performed when the ECU REC CHECK  
button is pressed.  
PLAY  
R.REVIEW: Perform REC REVIEW.  
PLAY:  
Play back the most-recently  
recorded clip from the beginning.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
<Note>  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
For each function of the USER switches, refer to [4-9-4  
Assigning Functions to USER MAIN, USER1 and USER2  
Buttons].  
104  
     
8-5-6  
WHITE BALANCE MODE  
8-5-7  
USER SW GAIN  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Remarks  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
FILTER INH  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to retain white balance  
S.GAIN  
30 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 30dB for  
SUPER GAIN.  
memory (A/B) data for individual filters.  
ON: Retain data in the A/B memory (2  
memory areas) regardless of the  
filters.  
_:  
• :  
Enable.  
Disable.  
– C U F E  
36 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 36dB for  
SUPER GAIN.  
OFF: Retain data for individual filters.  
– C U F E  
_:  
• :  
Enable.  
Disable.  
SHOCKLESS  
AWB  
OFF  
FAST  
NORMAL  
SLOW1  
SLOW2  
SLOW3  
Set SHOCKLESS AWB to ON (FAST/  
NORMAL/SLOW1-3) or OFF.  
SHOCKLESS AWB eliminates the shock  
caused by switching the WHITE BAL  
switch’s PRST/A/B setting. The switching  
time can also be selected.  
– C U F E  
42 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 42dB for  
SUPER GAIN.  
_:  
• :  
Enable.  
Disable.  
– C U F E  
– C U F E  
AWB AREA  
25%  
50%  
90%  
Switch the AWB detection area.  
25%: Detect 25% of area around the  
screen centre.  
48 dB  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 48dB for  
SUPER GAIN.  
_:  
• :  
Enable.  
Disable.  
50%: Detect 50% of area around the  
screen centre.  
– C U F E  
90%: Detect 90% of area in the full screen.  
DS.GAIN  
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 6 dBꢂ(1/25)  
– C U F E  
for DS.GAIN.  
6 dB  
(1/25)  
ꢂ
AWB & ABB  
OFFSET  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to reset the GAIN and  
PED values in the ROP menu when AWB  
and ABB are executed.  
_:  
Enable.  
Disable.  
• :  
– C U F E  
8
ON: Do not reset.  
OFF: Reset values.  
12 dB  
(1/12)  
ꢂ
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 12 dB  
for DS.GAIN.  
ꢂ(1/12)  
– C U F E  
_:  
Enable.  
Disable.  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
Set the AWB PRE colour temperature.  
• :  
– C U F E  
:
PRE  
5600K  
20 dB  
(1/5)  
ꢂ
_
•
Select whether or not to enable 20 dBꢂ(1/5)  
– C U F E  
for DS.GAIN.  
AWB A  
MEM  
VAR  
Select the function to be allocated to WHITE  
BAL switch A.  
MEM: Function to store values set by  
executing the auto white balance.  
VAR: Function to apply colour temperature  
set by COLOR TEMP A.  
_:  
Enable.  
Disable.  
• :  
– C U F E  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
– C U F E  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
A
Set the colour temperature when VAR is  
selected under AWB A.  
:
5600K  
– C U F E  
AWB B  
MEM  
ATW  
VAR  
Select the function to be allocated to WHITE  
BAL switch B.  
MEM: Function to store values set by  
executing auto white balance.  
ATW: Function to execute auto-tracking  
white balance.  
VAR: Function to apply colour temperature  
set by COLOR TEMP B.  
– C U F E  
COLOR TEMP 3200K  
Set the colour temperature when VAR is  
selected under AWB B.  
:
B
5600K  
– C U F E  
ATW SPEED  
NORMAL  
SLOW  
FAST  
Select the control speed for the auto-  
tracking white balance.  
– C U F E  
105  
   
8-6  
MAIN OPERATION  
8-5-8  
IRIS  
8-6-1  
BATTERY/P2CARD  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
A.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
Set the target value for auto iris.  
BATTERY  
SELECT  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
Select the battery to use. Remaining  
capacity detection is also performed  
according to the selected battery.  
The selectable battery types change  
depending on the settings under [8-6-2  
BATTERY SETTING1] and [8-6-3 BATTERY  
SETTING2].  
:
050  
:
HYTRN50  
HYTRN100  
HYTRN120  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
HP-90L  
BP-H120  
NP-L50  
ENDURA50  
ENDURA80  
BP-L60/90  
NiCd14  
– C U F E 100  
A.IRIS PEAK/  
AVE  
000  
:
040  
:
Determine the peak-to-standard ratio for the  
auto iris.  
A larger value sets the auto iris to respond to  
the peak in the IRIS detection window, while  
a smaller value sets it to respond to the  
average value in the window.  
100  
– C U F E  
A.IRIS MODE  
NORM1  
NORM2  
CENTR  
Select the auto iris detection window.  
NORM1:The window closer to the centre of  
the screen.  
NORM2:The window closer to bottom of the  
NiCd13  
NiCd12  
TYPE A  
TYPE B  
screen.  
CENTR:The spot window in the centre of the  
screen.  
Set the target value for the super iris.  
– C U F E  
– C U F –  
S.IRIS LEVEL  
000  
:
080  
:
EXT DC IN  
SELECT  
AC_ADPT  
PRO14  
TRIM14  
HYTRN50  
HYTRN100  
HYTRN120  
DIONIC90  
DIONIC160  
HP-90L  
BP-H120  
NP-L50  
ENDURA50  
ENDURA80  
BP-L60/90  
NiCd14  
Set the remaining capacity detection type  
when a battery is connected to the DC IN  
connector. Remaining capacity detection is  
also performed according to the selected  
battery type.  
The selectable battery types change  
depending on the settings under [8-6-2  
BATTERY SETTING1] and [8-6-3 BATTERY  
SETTING2].  
– C U F E 100  
IRIS GAIN  
CAM  
LENS  
Select which unit controls IRIS GAIN.  
<Note>  
Lenses with an extender, such asꢄC2, C0.8  
sold before FUJINON DIGI POWER,  
perform IRIS compensation while enabling  
the extender. Therefore, if this setting is  
switched to CAM, the camera’s iris control  
will not operate properly.  
<Note>  
The % display is disabled even when a  
digital battery is connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
– C U F E  
IRIS GAIN  
VALUE  
01  
:
08  
:
Set the adjustable value for IRIS GAIN. This  
setting is effective when CAM is selected for  
IRIS GAIN.  
NiCd13  
NiCd12  
– C U F E 20  
TYPE A  
TYPE B  
– C U F –  
BATT NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep for BATT NEAR END ALARM.  
– C U F –  
BATT NEAR  
END CANCEL OFF  
ON  
If set to ON, the warning tone and indication  
can be canceled by pressing the MODE  
CHECK button when BATT NEAR END  
ALARM is triggered.  
– C U F –  
BATT END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep for BATT END ALARM.  
– C U F –  
BATT REMAIN 100%  
Set the display content of the remaining  
battery capacity indicator bars in the display  
window when using a digital battery.  
FULL  
70%  
100%: Indicate FULL at 100% capacity.  
70%: Indicate FULL at 70% capacity.  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
106  
       
8-6-2  
BATTERY SETTING1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
CARD NEAR  
END ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep for P2 CARD NEAR END ALARM.  
PRO14  
_
•
_:  
• :  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
– C U F –  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
CARD NEAR  
END TIME  
3min  
2min  
Set the remaining time to indicate the P2  
CARD NEAR END TIME alarm.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the above  
menu, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
– C U F –  
11.0  
:
13.7  
:
CARD END  
ALARM  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to set the alarm to  
beep for P2 CARD END ALARM.  
– C U F –  
15.0  
– C U F –  
CARD REMAIN/ 5min/  
3min/  
„
„
Set the length of time for one segment („) of  
the P2 card’s remaining capacity indicator  
bars.  
5min: One segment represents 5 minutes.  
3min: One segment represents 3 minutes.  
„
TRIM14  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
• :  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
– C U F –  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
8
HYTRON50  
_
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
• :  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
•
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
HYTRON100  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.2  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
HYTRON120  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
107  
   
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
DIONIC90  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
ENDURA50  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.6  
:
11.0  
:
13.1  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
DIONIC160  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
ENDURA80  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.3  
:
11.0  
:
13.5  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HP-90L  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
BP-L60/90  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
12.4  
:
11.0  
:
11.2  
:
15.0  
15.0  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
BP-H120  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
<Note>  
• :  
The remaining battery capacity for digital batteries is displayed  
as inside the viewfinder (PRO14/TRIM14/HYTRON50/  
HYTRON100/HYTRON120/DIONIC90/DIONIC160/NP-L50).  
The BATT NEAR END alarm, however, is triggered according to  
the setting on the <BATTERY SETTING1> screen, regardless of  
the % indication.  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
%
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
11.5  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
NP-L50  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
Select auto or manual to set the NEAR END  
voltage.  
AUTO: Set voltage automatically.  
MANUAL:Set voltage manually.  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V  
steps.  
11.0  
:
13.0  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
108  
8-6-3  
BATTERY SETTING2  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
TYPE B  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
NiCd14  
_
•
_:  
• :  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
FULL  
12.0  
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
:
13.5  
:
17.0  
13.6  
:
15.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
END  
11.0  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
:
11.8  
:
15.0  
13.2  
:
15.0  
– C U F –  
END  
11.0  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
NiCd13  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
:
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
11.1  
:
• :  
– C U F –  
15.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
12.7  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
:
15.0  
11.0  
:
12.2  
:
END  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
8
– C U F –  
15.0  
NiCd12  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
11.5  
:
15.0  
END  
11.0  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
11.2  
:
– C U F –  
15.0  
TYPE A  
_
•
Enable selection under BATTERY SELECT.  
_:  
Enable selection.  
Disable selection.  
• :  
FULL  
12.0  
:
15.0  
:
Set the voltage to display the FULL  
indication in 0.1 V steps.  
17.0  
NEAR END 11.0  
Set the NEAR END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
13.6  
:
15.0  
END  
11.0  
When MANUAL is selected in the menu  
above, set the END voltage in 0.1 V steps.  
:
13.2  
:
– C U F –  
15.0  
109  
   
8-6-4  
MIC/AUDIO1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Select the test signal.  
Remarks  
TEST TONE  
NORMAL  
ALWAYS  
OFF  
FRONT VR CH1 FRONT  
Select whether or not to enable the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control for the signal selected  
as the input signal to AUDIO CH1.  
FRONT: Only enabled when FRONT is  
selected.  
NORMAL: Output test tones to CH1/2 when  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
the OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE  
selector switch is set to BARS and  
the AUDIO IN switch CH1 is set to  
FRONT.  
CHSEL  
OFF  
W.L.: Only enabled when WIRELESS is  
ALWAYS: Output test tones to CH1/2 when  
OUTPU/AUTO KNEE selector  
switch is set to BARS.  
selected.  
REAR:Only enabled when REAR is  
selected.  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not change by  
turning the volume control.  
Select whether or not to enable the FRONT  
AUDIO LEVEL control for the signal selected  
as an input signal to AUDIO CH2.  
FRONT: Only enabled when FRONT is  
selected.  
OFF:  
CHSEL  
Disable test tone output.  
:
Output test tone to the channels  
where the AUDIO IN switch CH1  
or CH2 is set to FRONT when  
OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE selector  
switch is set to BARS. The test  
tone is not output to CH3 and  
CH4.  
– C U F –  
FRONT VR CH2 FRONT  
W.L.  
REAR  
ALL  
– C U F –  
OFF  
W.L.: Only enabled when WIRELESS is  
selected.  
REAR:Only enabled when REAR is  
selected.  
8-6-5  
MIC/AUDIO2  
ALL: Enabled for any input selected.  
OFF: Disabled for any input selected.  
Recording level does not change by  
turning the volume control.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– C U F –  
FRONT MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Select the phantom power supply for the  
front microphone.  
MIC LOWCUT FRONT  
CH1  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
Select the microphone low-cut filter.  
REAR  
W.L.  
OFF  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Select the phantom power supply for the  
rear microphone.  
– C U F –  
MIC LOWCUT FRONT  
CH2  
– C U F –  
REAR  
W.L.  
OFF  
AUDIO OUT  
ON  
OFF  
Set the audio output circuit.  
OFF: Power-down output circuit to disable  
output.  
– C U F –  
ON: Enable output.  
MIC LOWCUT FRONT  
CH3  
– C U F –  
REAR  
W.L.  
OFF  
MONITOR  
SELECT  
STEREO  
MIX  
Select the signal format for the monitor  
output.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
MIC LOWCUT FRONT  
CH4  
FRONT MIC  
LEVEL  
–40dB  
–50dB  
Select the front microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear microphone input level.  
Select the rear line input level.  
REAR  
W.L.  
OFF  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC CH1 –50dB  
LIMITER CH1  
ON  
OFF  
Select the limiter.  
LVL  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
REAR MIC CH2 –50dB  
LIMITER CH2  
ON  
OFF  
Select the limiter.  
LVL  
–60dB  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
REAR LINE IN 0dB  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3  
ON  
OFF  
Select the level setting method.  
Select the level setting method.  
LVL  
+4dB  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
AUDIO OUT LVL 0dB  
+4dB  
Select the audio output level.  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH4  
ON  
OFF  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
HEADROOM  
18dB  
20dB  
Set the headroom (standard level).  
REC  
CH3/CH4  
SW  
CH1/2  
Select the signals to be recorded in CH3  
and CH4.  
SW: According to camera’s CH3 and CH4  
selector switches.  
CH1/2: Record same signals as CH1 and  
CH2.  
– C U F –  
WIRELESS  
WARN  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the alarm to  
trigger for poor wireless receiver reception.  
– C U F –  
– C U F –  
25M REC CH  
SEL  
2CH  
4CH  
Select the audio channels to be recorded in  
the DVCPRO and DV formats.  
2CH: Only recorded in CH1 and CH2.  
4CH: Recorded in all channels from CH1  
to CH4.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
– C U F –  
110  
       
8-6-6  
TC/UB  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
TC OUT  
TCG  
TCG/TCR  
Select the time code to be output to the time  
code output connector.  
TCG: Always output time code generator  
value.  
TCG/TCR:  
UB MODE  
USER  
TIME  
DATE  
EXT  
TCG  
Select the user bits mode.  
USER:Select UB value set in the LCD  
section.  
TIME: Select local time (hours, minutes,  
seconds).  
Display time code generator value in  
E-E mode, and time code reader  
value in V-V mode.  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
digits of year, month, date, time).  
EXT: Slaved to UB from TC-IN. If reading  
fails, USER value is retained.  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
– C U F –  
Select same camera shoting  
information (frame rate, etc.) with the  
VAUX UB (VITC UB).  
8-6-7  
UMID SET/INFO  
REGEN:Read out value stored in the card  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
and record value continuously.  
– C U F –  
Remarks  
VITC UB MODE USER/EXT  
Select the user bits mode for VAUX TC  
(VITC).  
COUNTRY  
NO-INFO  
Input the user’s country. NO-INFO is  
displayed until the input completes.  
TIME  
DATE  
TCG  
FRM RATE  
REGEN  
USER/EXT:  
If UB MODE is set to EXT, the EXT  
value is recorded. If not, USER value  
set by UB is recorded.  
– C U F –  
ORGANIZATION NO-INFO  
Input the user’s organisation or company  
name. NO-INFO is displayed until the input  
completes.  
TIME: Select local time (hours, minutes,  
– C U F –  
8
seconds).  
DATE: Select local date and time (2 last  
digits of year, month, date, time).  
TCG: TCG value enters UB.  
FRM RATE:  
USER  
NO-INFO  
Input the user name. NO-INFO is displayed  
until the input completes.  
– C U F –  
DEVICE NODE  
Indicate the product ID number.  
Select same camera shoting  
information (frame rate, etc.) with the  
VAUX UB (VITC UB).  
– – – – –  
REGEN:Read out value stored in card and  
record value continuously.  
– C U F –  
<Note>  
TCG SET HOLD ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for the feature that  
always starts recording (when the power is  
turned ON again) the TCG value that was  
set before the power is turned OFF.  
Please refer to [4-5-6 Setting the UMID Information] for the  
UMID information setting.  
– C U F –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
FIRST REC TC REGEN  
PRESET  
For the first recording after the power is  
turned on, a P2 card is inserted and then  
switching from this P2 card to another  
recording-target P2 card is performed,  
select whether or not to regenerate the time  
code as the value on the new P2 card.  
REGEN:For clips recorded on the recording-  
target P2 card, regenerate the time  
code as the time code of the clip that  
has the most recent date and time.  
PRESET:  
Use the camera-recorder’s internal  
time code.  
<Note>  
Set the date and time accurately. For  
guidance on setting, see [4-5-2 Setting the  
Internal Clock’s Date and Time].  
– C U F –  
P. O F F L C D  
DISPLAY  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to display the time  
code setting and counter indication on the  
LCD monitor when the power is turned OFF.  
ON: Display setting and indication while  
the power is turned OFF.  
OFF: Power-down LCD monitor while  
camera power is turned OFF. Setting  
and indication disabled.  
– C U F –  
111  
   
8-7  
FILE  
8-7-1  
SD CARD READ/WRITE  
8-7-3  
LENS FILE  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
R.SELECT  
1
:
8
Select the file number to read out.  
Read out the data from the SD card.  
Select the file number to write in.  
FILE NO.  
1
:
8
Select the lens file number.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
READ  
READ  
Read the lens file data.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
W.SELECT  
1
:
WRITE  
Write the lens file data.  
8
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
WRITE  
Write the camera-recorder’s menu data to  
the SD card.  
TITLE1-8  
Up to 12 letters can be set for the title name.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
CARD CONFIG  
Format the SD card.  
– – – – –  
8-7-4  
SCENE  
TITLE READ  
Read out the title of the data recorded on the  
SD card.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
– – – – –  
Remarks  
TITLE1-8:  
Up to 8 letters can be set for the title name.  
READ USER  
DATA  
Read out the data from the user area in the  
memory.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
SCENE SEL  
1
:
4
Select the scene file.  
Read the scene file.  
Write the scene file.  
8-7-2  
SD CARD R/W SELECT  
– – – – –  
READ  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
– – – – –  
ID READ/  
WRITE  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the  
CAMERA ID when reading out or writing to  
the SD card.  
WRITE  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
USER MENU  
SELECT R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the FILE  
MENU settings when reading out or writing  
to the SD card.  
RESET  
Reset the scene file values to the initial  
values.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
SYSTEM MENU ON  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the SYSTEM SETTING page  
when reading out or writing to the SD card.  
TITLE 1-3  
Create the scene file title.  
R/W  
OFF  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
PAINT MENU  
LEVEL R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the adjusted  
values on the PAINT page when reading out  
or writing to the SD card.  
TITLE 4  
FILMLIKE  
Create the scene file title. The title, including  
the data, is set to FILMLIKE, both as the  
initial value and after resetting.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
PAINT MENU  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the PAINT MENU page when  
reading out or writing to the SD card.  
SW(  
„
) R/W  
– – – F –  
8-7-5  
INITIALIZE  
VF MENU  
R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the VF page when reading out or  
writing to the SD card.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
– – – F –  
Remarks  
CAM OPE  
MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the CAM OPERATION page when  
reading out or writing to the SD card.  
READ  
FACTORY DATA  
The menu (USER MENU, MAIN MENU,  
OPTION MENU) values are all reset to  
factory settings.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
MAIN OPE  
MENU R/W  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAIN OPERATION page  
when reading out or writing to the SD card.  
WRITE USER  
DATA  
Save the user preference menu data in the  
camera’s internal memory.  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
MAINTE MENU ON  
R/W  
Select whether or not to include the set  
values on the MAINTENANCE page when  
reading out or writing to the SD card.  
RESET LENS  
FILES  
Reset the lens file data to the factory  
settings.  
OFF  
– – – F –  
– – – – –  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
112  
           
8-8  
MAINTENANCE  
8-8-1  
SYSTEM CHECK  
8-8-5  
DIAGNOSTIC1  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
COLOR CHECK ON  
ON/OFF switching for checking proper  
operation of the camera-recorder.  
Displays the centre Y and RGB levels on the  
viewfinder to indicate whether the signals  
have been properly processed and  
transmitted from the optical system to the  
digital system.  
CAMSOFT(IN)  
Display the software version for the  
microprocessor-controlled flash.  
OFF  
– – – – –  
CAMSOFT  
(OUT)  
Display the software version for the external  
flash.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
CAM TABLE  
Display the table version.  
– – – – –  
8-8-2  
LENS ADJ  
FONT ROM  
Display the character font version.  
– – – – –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CAM DSP  
FPGA1  
Display the program version for the FPGA  
(Field Programmable Gate Array) that  
processes camera block signals.  
F2.8 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is only set to F2.8 when this item set  
to ON.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
CAM DSP  
FPGA2  
Display the program version for the FPGA  
that processes camera block signals.  
F16 ADJ  
ON  
OFF  
The iris is only set to F16 when this item set  
to ON.  
– – – – –  
– – – – –  
8
CAM SYS  
FPGA  
Display the program version for the FPGA  
that processes camera block signals.  
– – – – –  
8-8-3  
BLACK SHADING  
PULSE FPGA  
Display the program version for the FPGA  
that processes the CCD scanning.  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
– – – – –  
Remarks  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for digital black shading  
compensation.  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
– C U F E  
DETECTION  
(DIG)  
–
Execute digital black shading compensation.  
– – – – –  
8-8-4  
WHITE SHADING  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
CORRECT  
ON  
OFF  
ON/OFF switching for white shading  
compensation.  
– C U F E  
DETECTION  
(V SAW)  
–
Execute white shading compensation.  
– – – – –  
113  
           
8-9  
OPTION MENU  
8-8-6  
DIAGNOSTIC2  
8-9-1  
OPTION  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
Remarks  
SYSCON SOFT  
Display the software version for the system  
control microprocessor.  
ENG  
SECURITY  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to prohibit opening the  
menu screen.  
ON: Menu screen cannot be opened.  
Please consult your nearest service  
centre to release the setting.  
– – – – –  
LCD SOFT  
Display the software version for the LCD  
microprocessor.  
OFF: Menu screen can be opened.  
– C – – –  
– – – – –  
P.HALF SHUT ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to enable the 1/2  
shutter when the shutter is set to OFF while  
operating in the progressive mode.  
ON: Enable 1/2 shutter.  
P2CS OS  
Display the OS version for the streaming  
controller.  
– – – – –  
OFF: Disable 1/2 shutter.  
P2CS AP  
Display the application version for the  
streaming controller.  
– C – – –  
ID MIX INH  
ON  
OFF  
Select whether or not to inhibit mixing the ID  
in the camera image.  
ON: Inhibit mixing. ID is not mixed in the  
– – – – –  
MSC FPGA  
Display the program version for the  
streaming control FPGA.  
camera image.  
OFF: Do not inhibit. Camera ID setting  
under VF INDCATOR1 is reflected in  
the camera image.  
– – – – –  
FLT FPGA  
Display the program version for the FPGA  
that processes recording / playback signals.  
– C – – –  
AUDIO OUT  
DELAY  
DELAYED  
THROUGH  
Select whether or not to delay audio,  
headphone and speaker outputs.  
DELAYED:  
– – – – –  
SIF FPGA  
Display the program version for the serial  
interface FPGA.  
Delay audio output in  
synchronisation with video output.  
THROUGH:  
– – – – –  
Output audio input without delay.  
This setting prevents echo effect  
between the sound source and audio  
output when the sound source is  
near the camera-recorder.  
8-8-7  
HOURS METER  
– C – – –  
Items/  
Data Saved  
Adjustable  
Range  
Remarks  
The ____ in the Adjustable Range column indicates the preset  
mode.  
OPERATION  
Display total hours the camera power has  
been turned ON.  
– – – – –  
LCD  
BACKLIGHT  
Display total hours the LCD monitor  
backlight power has been turned ON.  
– – – – –  
P. O N T I M E S  
Display total number of times the power  
switch has been turned ON.  
– – – – –  
114  
       
Chapter 9 Specifications  
Synchro-scan shutter:  
1/50.4 to 1/248.0  
[General]  
Lens mount:  
Power supplyꢀꢁ  
Power consumption:  
DC 12 V (11.0 V - 17.0 V).  
2/3-inch bayonet type.  
Colour separation optical system:  
Optical prism (F1.4).  
ꢁ
24 W (Main unit only, with LCD monitor OFF).  
27 W (With theSDI-E1394 option installed, LCD  
monitor ON).  
Sensitivity:  
F13 (2000 lux, 89.9% reflection).  
Minimum object illuminance:  
0.01 lux  
(F1.4 with +48 dB (S.GAIN) and +20 dB (DS.GAIN)).  
Video S/N:  
indicates safety information.  
Operating temperature:  
0 °C to +40 °C.  
Storage temperature:  
–20 °C to +60 °C.  
Operating humidity:  
63 dB (standard).  
Horizontal resolution:  
750 lines (centre, standard).  
Vertical resolution:  
10% to maximum 85% (relative humidity).  
Maximum continuous operation:  
Approximately 120 minutes (main unit only, with LCD  
monitor OFF and using an Anton/Bauer Hytron50  
battery).  
450/500 lines (SUPER V mode).  
LCD Monitor:  
3.5-inch LCD colour monitor, 200,000 pixels.  
Dimensions (W C H [excluding handle and wireless  
option cover] C D):  
Memory Card Unit  
9
Video recording formats:  
137 C 209 C 318 mm.  
Weight:  
Selectable from DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV.  
Audio recording formats:  
4.2 kg (main unit only, excluding VF mount).  
48 kHz 16-bit 4ch (DVCPRO50).  
48 kHz 16-bit 2ch/4ch selectable (DVCPRO).  
Recording/playback time:  
[Camera Unit]  
Approximately 8 minutes:  
Pickup devices:  
When recorded in DVCPRO format using one AJ-  
P2C002SG card with audio signals recorded on 2  
channels.  
2/3-inch, 600,000 pixels IT CCD C 3.  
CC/ND Filters:  
1: 3200K  
2: 5600K + 1/8ND  
3: 5600K  
4: 5600K + 1/64ND  
<Note>  
This recording time represents one shot  
continuously recorded on a P2 card. The recording  
time may be shorter, depending on the number of  
shots recorded.  
Quantizing:  
14-bit linear/18 MHz  
Digital signal processing:  
Video System  
36 MHz  
Horizontal drive frequency:  
18 MHz  
Programmable gain:  
Three positions (L/M/H) can be set by selecting from  
–3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +15, +18, +21, +24, +27 or  
+30 dB.  
Analog component output:  
Frequency range:  
Y:  
25 Hz to 5.75 MHz, +1.0/–3.0 dB  
(DVCPRO50).  
PB/PR:  
25 Hz to 2.75 MHz +1.0/–3.0 dB  
(DVCPRO50).  
Super Gain (S.GAIN):  
Selectable from +30, +36, +42 or +48 dB.  
Digital Super Gain (DS.GAIN):  
Selectable from +6, +12 or +20 dB.  
Shutter speeds:  
S/N:  
Minimum 55 dB.  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
115  
 
Audio System  
Time code input  
TC IN:  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz (synchronised with video).  
Quantizing:  
BNC, 0.5 VP-P to 8 VP-P, 10 kJ.  
Time code output  
16 bits  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz - 20 kHz 1.0 dB (at standard level).  
Dynamic range:  
TC OUT:  
BNC, low impedance, 2.0 0.5 VP-P.  
Miscellaneous  
Minimum 85 dB (1 kHz, AWTD).  
Distortion factor:  
0.1% or less (1 kHz, standard level).  
Headroom:  
DC IN:  
XLR, 4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V).  
DC OUT:  
18 dB  
4 pins, DC 12 V (DC 11 V - 17 V).  
Maximum rated current: 1 A.  
LENS:  
[Input/output Unit]  
Multiple 12 pins.  
EVF:  
Video input  
Multiple 20 pins.  
GPS:  
6 pins (connector for AJ-GPS900G).  
ECU:  
GEN LOCK IN:  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J.  
(VIDEO IN can be selected by switching menu.)  
6 pins (connector for AJ-EC3E).  
Video output  
MON OUT:  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J.  
VIDEO OUT:  
Accessories  
Shoulder Strap.  
BNC, 1.0 VP-P, 75 J.  
Front Audio Level control knob.  
Screw, M2 C 6 mm (XYNZ+J6FZ) C1 pc.  
Audio input  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:  
XLR C 2, 3 pins.  
LINE, MIC, and +48 V switch-selectable.  
LINE:  
0 dBu.  
(0/+4 dBu selectable with menu)  
–60 dBu.  
MIC:  
(–60/–50 dBu selectable with menu)  
MIC + 48V: Compatible with +48V phantom power  
supply.  
–60 dBu.  
(–60/–50 dBu selectable with menu)  
MIC IN:  
XLR, 3 pins.  
+48V phantom: ON/OFF selectable with menu,  
3 kJ balanced, –50/–40 dBu  
selectable with menu  
WIRELESS IN:  
25 pin D-SUB, –40 dBu.  
Audio output  
AUDIO OUT CH1/CH2:  
XLR, 5 pins, 0 dBu.  
(0/+4 dBu selectable with menu)  
Balanced low-impedance output.  
Headphones  
Stereo mini jackꢄCꢄ2  
116  
MEMO  
9
117  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe  
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH  
Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-235-481  
Printed in Japan  
VQT0L49-1 (E)  
E
F0604T1074 -F  
D

Redring LP330 User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio Car Video System MV7SC User Manual
Pyramid Car Audio 401EP User Manual
Plantronics EXPLORER 300 User Manual
Pioneer Premier TS W1007D4 User Manual
Philips STO2520W User Manual
Panasonic SDRH85K User Manual
Mr Handsfree BLUE BIKER GBNLFRDKCZSKEI User Manual
Kenwood KAC X4D User Manual
Kenwood DIGITAL AUDIO KDC 8070W User Manual